EIA STUDY OF GIRAL LIGNITE MINE, DISTRICT BARMER, …environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/18122014RH... · 2014. 12. 18. · WAPCOS LIMITED (A Government of India Undertaking)

RAJASTHAN STATE MINES & MINERALS LTD.

EIA STUDY OF GIRAL LIGNITE MINE,DISTRICT BARMER, RAJASTHAN

(Total Area: 2655.70 ha, Production Capacity:1.0 MTPA)

WAPCOS LIMITED(A Government of India Undertaking)

76 C, Sector 18, Gurgaon - 122015, Haryana, INDIATel. +91-124-2397396,Fax. +91-124-2397392

Email: [email protected]

(A Government of Rajasthan Enterprise)

FINAL REPORT

DECEMBER 2014

i

CONTENTS

CHAPTER-1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 General 1-11.2 Rajasthan State Mines & Minerals Limited 1-11.3 Objectives of the EIA Study 1-31.4 Stages in an EIA Study 1-41.5 Outline of the Report 1-51.6 Compliance of TOR 1-6

CHAPTER-2 MINE DESCRIPTION

2.1 General 2-12.2 Mine Details 2-22.3 Quality of Lignite 2-22.4 Method of Mining 2-32.5 Proposed Rate of Production, Life of Mine as per this Mine 2-13

Mine Closure Plan and Calender programme of Production2.6 Conceptual Minning Plan 2-132.7 Overburden Disposal 2-142.8 Topsoil Stacking 2-152.9 Use of Excavated Lignite 2-152.10 Manpower 2-15

CHAPTER-3 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE STATUS-PHYSICO-CHEMICAL ASPECTS

3.1 Introduction 3-13.2 General information 3-23.3 Climate 3-23.4 Micro Meteorology 3-43.5 Topography 3-43.6 Drainage Pattern 3-43.7 Geology 3-53.8 Seismicity 3-63.9 Soils 3-63.10 Water Environment 3-83.11 Air Environment 3-103.12 Noise Environment 3-193.13 Landuse 3-213.14 Socio-Economic Aspects 3-23

CHAPTER-4 ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS

4.1 General 4-14.2 Terrestrial Ecology – floral Accounts 4-14.3 Field Studies 4-24.4 Fauna 4-184.5 Authenticated List of Flora and Fauna 4-33

ii

CHAPTER-5 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS

5.1 General 5-15.2 Impacts on Air Environment 5-15.3 Impacts on Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations 5-75.4 Impacts on Water Environment 5-105.5 Impacts on Land Environment 5-115.6 Impacts on Ecology 5-135.7 Impacts of Rehabilitation and Reclamation Works 5-145.8 Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment 5-19

CHAPTER-6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

6.1 General 6-16.2 Air Environment 6-16.3 Noise Control Measures 6-36.4 Water Environment 6-46.5 Land Environment 6-56.6 Greenbelt Development 6-116.7 Conservation Plan for Floral species 6-126.8 Conservation Plan for Faunal species 6-146.9 Socio-economic Environment 6-16

CHAPTER-7 MINE CLOSURE PLAN

7.1 Introduction 7-17.2 Mine Detail 7-17.3 Water Quality Management 7-67.4 Air Quality 7-77.5 Waste Management 7-87.6 Top Soil Management 7-117.7 Coal Beneficiation and Management of Coal Projects 7-157.8 Infrastructure 7-157.9 Disposal of Mining Machinery 7-177.10 Safety and Security 7-177.11 Economic Repercussions of Closure of Mine 7-187.12 Time Schedule for Abandonment 7-187.13 Abandonment Cost 7-207.14 Financial Assurance 7-217.15 Responsibility of Mine Owner 7-227.16 Provision for Mine Closure 7-227.17 CSR 7-227.18 Land Compensation and R&R Package Paid to PAFs 7-23

CHAPTER-8 RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 Introduction 8-18.2 Identification of Hazards 8-1

iii

8.3 Innundation 8-18.4 Disaster due to failure of PIT Slope 8-28.5 Disaster due to failure of Waste Dump 8-28.6 Effect of Haulage Truck operation on Dump Point Stability 8-38.7 Disaster due to surface fire/stack fires 8-48.8 Care and Maintenance during temporary discontinuance 8-58.9 Disaster Management Plan 8-68.10 Roles and Responsibilities of Emergency Team 8-78.11 Outside organizations involved in control of disaster 8-88.12 Emergency control procedure 8-88.13 Alarm System to be Followed During Disaster 8-108.14 Actions to be Taken on Hearing the Warning Signal 8-10

CHAPTER-9 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

9.1 Objectives 9-19.2 Areas of concern 9-19.3 Water 9-19.4 Air 9-29.5 Noise 9-29.6 Mine Reclamation and Greenbelt Development 9-39.7 Environmental Management Cell 9-3

CHAPTER-10 FINDINGS OF PUBLIC HEARING

10.1 Introduction 10-110.2 Key issues raised during Public Hearing 10-2

CHAPTER-11 COST ESTIMATES

11.1 Environmental Management Plan 11-111.2 Environmental Monitoring Programme 11-1

CHAPTER-12 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS INVOLVED 12-1IN THE EIA STUDY

RSMML EIA study for Girallignite mine, Barmer

1-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-1INTRODUCTION

1.1 GENERALThe State of Rajasthan has rich mineral resources of non-ferrous metals such as copper, lead

and zinc, mica and industrial minerals such as rock phosphate, limestone, gypsum, fluorspar,

bentonite, graphite, siliceous earth, granite, etc. The state also has significant lignite resources

as well.

The mining activities could lead to significant environmental problems if its operations are not

properly planned. There could be problems of air pollution during excavation or dumping of

overburden, increased noise levels, and vibrations, loss of valuable top soil, topographical

changes, increase in traffic, adverse impact on ecology, etc. The severity and extent of these

problems can be ascertained through an Environmental Impact Assessment Study.

1.2 RAJASTHAN STATE MINES & MINERALS LIMITED (RSMML)The Rajasthan State Mines & Minerals Limited (RSMML) is the major mining organization in the

state of Rajasthan, which extracts various mineral in different districts of the state. The

organization is involved in mining of various minerals including Limestone, Rock Phosphate,

Gypsum, Fluorspar, Lignite, Steel grade Limestone, Multi-metal and Granite.

The present study deals with EIA study for lignite mining in sub-blocks Giral, Jalilo and Thumbli

of Giral Lignite mine, District Barmer. The mine can be approached by motorable Pucca Road

and it is connected to metal road of Bhadka-Thumbli Road. National Highway no. 15 is passing

about 12 km. away from the area. Barmer railway station is the nearest railway station lying on

Jodhpur- Munabao section of N-W railway. The mine location map is enclosed as Figure-1.1.

The current lignite demand in the state of Rajasthan is met by Giral mine. The mine is

operational since 1994. Giral mine was first operational opencast lignite mine in the state of

Rajasthan. To meet the ever-increasing lignite demand for generation of power through existing

power plant of M/s RVUNL (State PSU) and meet the industrial demand and also to generate

additional revenue, RSMML commenced lignite mining in the state. The key plan is enclosed as

Figure-1.2.


1-2WAPCOS Limited

Figure-1.1: Mine Location Map

The Giral lignite mine is under operation since 21.12.1994. The first Environmental Clearance

(EC) was accorded on 12.12.1994 under the norms of the EIA notification 1994. Due to the

expansion of production capacity from 0.3 MTPA to 1 MTPA, another EC was granted on 03-01-

2006. However, as the mine lease period is due to be expired in December 2014, a fresh EC is

required to be sought from Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change as the earlier

EC was in accordance with the EIA notification of 1994. Now the EC for Giral mine is being

sought under the EIA notification of September 14, 2006 and its subsequent amendments.

The EIA study for the proposed Giral lignite mine has been conducted by WAPCOS Limited, a

Government of India Undertaking, under Ministry of Water Resources, River Development and

Ganga Rejuvenation.


1-3WAPCOS Limited

Figure-1.2: Key Plan

1.3 OBJECTIVES OF THE EIA STUDYThe Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study is the process in which environmental

factors are integrated into project planning and decision making in a way that is consistent with

sustainable development.

The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study is considered to include:

- Assessment of the environmental impacts of the development activity.

- Prediction of the changes in environmental quality, which could result as direct and

indirect consequences of that development activity.

- An implementable plan for management and monitoring of environmental quality as a

result of the implementation of the project.


1-4WAPCOS Limited

1.4 STAGES IN EIA STUDYThe purpose of this section is to enumerate the methodology for Environmental Impact

Assessment (EIA) Study which has been followed for the proposed project as well. The various

steps in conducting EIA study are given in following paragraphs.

Scoping: An exhaustive list of all likely impacts drawing information from as many sources as

possible is prepared. The next step is to select a manageable number of attributes which are

likely to be affected as a result of the Giral lignite mining project. The various criteria applied for

selection of the important impacts are as follows:

- magnitude- extent- significance- special sensitivity.

Before starting the study, an exhaustive list of all likely impacts was prepared to ascertain the

various aspects to be covered as a part of EIA study. The same is enclosed as Table-1.1.

Table-1.1: Scoping matrix adopted for the EIA study for Giral Lignite mine, districtBarmer

Potential Negative Impacts covered in the study Modification/loss of soil profile, vegetation. Degradation of surface waters by soil erosion from disturbed areas, waste piles and

stockpiles. Contamination of surface waters and shallow groundwater wastes, (aquifers) by waste water

from mine drainage, equipment servicing, and sanitary and domestic wastes. Reduced reproduction and population of wildlife from habitat modification and loss. Degradation/loss of vegetation (and soil productivity) from discharge of contaminated

waters. Contamination of surface areas with overburden and excavated lignite. Impacts on ambient air quality. Degradation of air quality from routine operational (diesel) emissions. Land-use conflicts. Impacts on humans and wildlife by noise from equipment operation. Increased demands on services and facilities in local communities, social and cultural

conflicts, concern with community stability. Conflicts with native cultures, traditions, and life-styles. Impacts of cultural resources and historic sites Wildlife loss through poaching. Secondary population growth and related effects.


1-5WAPCOS Limited

Baseline study: Before the start of the project, it is essential to ascertain the baseline levels of

appropriate environmental parameters which could be significantly affected by the

implementation of the project. The planning of baseline survey emanated from shortlisting of

impacts prepared during identification. The baseline study involved both field work and review of

existing documents, which is necessary for identification of data which may already have been

collected for other purposes.

Impact prediction: is essentially a process to forecast the future environmental conditions of

the project area that might be expected to occur as a result of the construction and operation of

the proposed project. An attempt has been made to forecast future environmental conditions

quantitatively to the extent possible. But for certain parameters which cannot be quantified,

qualitative assessment has been made so that planners and decision-makers are aware of their

existence as well as their possible implications.

Environmental Management Plan: The approach for formulation of an Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) is to maximize the positive environmental impacts and minimize the

negative ones. The steps taken generally consist of modifications of plans, mining techniques,

as well as operational and management practices. After selection of suitable environmental

mitigation measures, the cost required for implementation of various management measures is

also estimated, to have an idea of their cost-effectiveness.

Environmental Monitoring Programme: An Environmental Monitoring Programme has been

suggested to oversee the environmental safeguards, to ascertain the agreement between

prediction and reality and to suggest remedial measures not foreseen during the planning stage

but arising during operation and to generate data for further use.

1.5 OUTLINE OF THE REPORTThe main sections of the EIA Report are as follows:

Chapter 1 gives a brief profile of the project. The chapter also presents the objectives and

stages in the EIA study.

Chapter 2 describes the project details including operational details, mining techniques,

production rate, backfilling and reclamation plan, etc.

Chapter 3 presents the baseline environmental status for the physico-chemical aspects of the

Study Area (Buffer Zone).

Chapter 4 describes the baseline environmental status for the ecological aspects of the Study

Area (Buffer Zone).


1-6WAPCOS Limited

Chapter 5 predicts the impacts likely to accrue on various facets of environment due to the

proposed lignite mining project.

Chapter 6 outlines the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for amelioration of adverse

impacts and conservation of flora and fauna.

Chapter 7 describes the Mine Closure Plan

Chapter 8 outlines the Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan.

Chapter 9 delineates the Environmental Monitoring Programme for implementation during mine

operation phase.

Chapter-10 summarizes the Public Hearing details.

Chapter-11 summarizes the cost estimate required for implementation of the Environmental

Management Plan and Environmental Monitoring Programme.

Chapter-12 summarizes the disclosure of consultants involved in the EIA study

1.6 COMPLIANCE OF TORThe compliance of TOR approved by 17th Expert Appraisal Committee held on 24-07-14, for

Thermal and Coal Mining Projects, Ministry of Environment and Forests is enclosed as

Appendix.

APPENDIX-TOR COMPLIANCE STATEMENT

S.No TOR Reference(i) An EIA-EMP Report would be prepared

for ??.. MTPA rated capacity in anML/project area of??ha based on thegeneric structure specified in Appendix IIIof the EIA Notification 2006.

The EIA study for existing Giral mine withmine lease area of 2655.70 ha , with capacityof 1.0 MTPA is made on the structurespecified in Appendix III of the EIA Notification2006.

(ii) An EIA-EMP Report would be preparedfor ??. MTPA rated capacity cover theimpacts and management plan for theproject specific activities on theenvironment of the region, and theenvironmental quality ?air, water, land,biotic community, etc. through collection ofdata and information, generation of dataon impacts including prediction modellingfor ???. MTPA of coal production basedon approval of project/Mining Plan for???MTPA. Baseline data collection can befor any season except monsoon.

The mine production having 1.0 MTPA ratedcapacity as per the approved Mine Plan wereconsidered for preparation of EIA report.(Refer Chapter-2, Mine description of the EIAreport).The primary data comprising of air, water, soil,noise, meteorological parameters, andterrestrial ecology was carried out for summerseason from April 2014 to June 2014.Accordingly Chapters on Impact Assessment,Environmental Management Plan andEnvironmental Monitoring Programme,Disaster Management Plan, etc. have beenprepared and outlined in the EIA Report. Thesanction letter of TOR is enclosed asAppendix-I. The location map is enclosed asAppendix-II.

(iii) A map specifying locations of the State,District and Project location.

Mine Location Map has been enclosed asFigure-1.1 of EIA Report.

(iv) A Study area map of the core zone and 10km area of the buffer zone (1:50,000scale) clearly delineating the majortopographical features such as the landuse, surface drainage ofrivers/streams/nalas/canals, locations ofhuman habitations, major constructionsincluding railways, roads, pipelines, majorindustries/mines and other pollutingsources. In case of ecologically sensitiveareas such as BiosphereReserves/National Parks/WL Sanctuaries/Elephant Reserves, forests (Reserved/Protected), migratory corridors of fauna,and areas where endangered fauna andplants of medicinal and economicimportance found in the 15 km area ofthe buffer zone should be given.

The Study Area Map of the Core and BufferZone (on 1:50,000 scale) is enclosed asAppendix-III

There is no ecologically sensitive area in the15 km radius i.e., buffer zone .

(v) Land use map (1: 50,000 scale) based ona recent satellite imagery of the study areamay alsobe provided with explanatory note of theland use. Satellite imagery per se is notrequired.

Classified imagery of the study area is givenas Figure-3.7 of the EIA Report. Theexplanatory note is given is enclosed assection-3.13 of the EIA Report.

(vi) Map showing the core zone delineatingthe agricultural land (irrigated andunirrigated, uncultivable land (as defined

Revenue Map is enclosed as Appendix-III-A

S.No TOR Referencein the revenue records), forest areas (asper records), along withother physical features such as waterbodies, etc should be furnished.

(vii) A contour map showing the area drainageof the core zone and 2-5 km of the bufferzone (where the water courses of the corezone ultimately join the major rivers/streams outside the lease/project area)should also be clearly indicated as aseparate map.

Contour Map showing the area drainage ofcore zone and buffer zone is enclosed asAppendix-IV.

The details of drainage pattern is given inSection 3.6 of EIA Report.

(viii) A detailed Site plan of the mine showingthe various proposed break-up of the landfor mining operations such as the quarryarea, OB dumps, green belt, safety zone,buildings, infrastructure, CHP, ETP,Stockyard, township/colony (within andadjacent to the ML), undisturbed area andif any, in topography such as existingroads, drains/natural water bodies are tobe left undisturbed along with any naturaldrainage adjoining the lease /project andmodification of thereof in terms ofconstruction of embankments/bunds,proposed diversion/re-channelling ofthe water courses, etc., approach roads,major haul roads, etc.

The details of mine description including thequarry area, OB dumps, green belt, safetyzone, buildings, infrastructure etc is given inChapter-2 and Chapter-7 of EIA Report.

(ix) In case of any proposed diversion ofnallah/canal/river, the proposed route ofdiversion/modification of drainage andtheir realignment, construction ofembankment etc. should also be shownon the map.

Not Applicable

(x) Similarly if the project involves diversion ofany road/railway line passing through theML/project area, the proposed route ofdiversion and its realignment should beshown.

Not Applicable

(xi) Break up of lease/project area as perdifferent land uses and their stage ofacquisition.

The landuse pattern of open cast mine isgiven in Table-2.3 of Chapter-2 of EIA Reportand given as below:

Land Use Details of Opencast ProjectS.No Land Use Within ML

Area (ha)OutsideML Area(ha)

Total

1 AgriculturalLand

1975.04 - 1975.04

2 Forest land - - -3 Wasteland 142.88 - 142.884 Grazing

land471.41 - 471.41

5 Surfacewaterbodies

3.685 - 3.685

6 Settlements

41 - 41

7 Others 21.685 - 21.685

S.No TOR Reference(Specify)Total 2655.7 - 2655.7

Out of 1975.04 ha, an area of 1380.13 ha was acquired in 3stages under L.A. Act. 1894.

(xii) Break-up of lease/project area as permining operations

Please refer Table-2.3 of Chapter-2 of EIAReport.

(xiii) Impact of changes in the land use due tothe start of projects if much of the landbeing acquired is agricultural land/forestland /grazing land

No fresh land acquisition is involved as onlyrenewal of lease is envisaged. No forest landis involved.The Giral lignite mine is under operation since21.12.1994. The first EnvironmentalClearance (EC) was accorded on 12.12.1994under the norms of the EIA notification 1994.Due to the expansion of production capacityfrom 0.3 MTPA to 1 MTPA, another EC wasgranted on 3-1-2006, However, as the minelease period is due to expired in 20th

December 2014, a fresh EC is required to besought from Ministry of Environment andForests as the earlier EC under the Provisionof EIA notification, 1994 and its subsequentlyamendment. Now the EC for Giral mine isbeing sought under the EIA Notification ofSeptember 14, 2006 and its subsequentamendments.

(xiv) Collection of one season (non-monsoon)primary baseline data on environmentalquality-air (PM10, PM2.5, Sox, NOx and heavymetals such as Hg, Pb, Cr, As, etc), noise,water (surface and groundwater), soil alongwith one-season met data coinciding withthe same season for AAQ collection period.

The baseline data for various aspectsincluding ambient air quality, micro-meteorology, water quality, soil, noise, floraand fauna was collected for summer seasonduring the months of April-June 2014.

(xv) Map of the study area (1: 50, 000 scale)(core and buffer zone clearly delineatingthe location of various stationssuperimposed with location of habitats,other industries/mines, polluting sources.The number and location of the stations inboth core zone and buffer zone should beselected on the basis of size oflease/project area, the proposed impacts inthe downwind (air)/downstream(surface water)/ groundwater regime(based on flow). One station should be inthe upwind/upstream/non-impact/ non-polluting area as a control station. Themonitoring should be as per CPCBguidelines and parameters for water testingfor both ground water and surface water asper ISI standards and CPCB classificationwherever applicable. Values should beprovided basedon desirable limits.

The Study area map is given in Figure-3.1 andFigure 3.7 and details are given in Table-3.17of EIA Report.

Sampling location Map of study are (1:50,000)map is enclosed as Appendix-V.and Figure3.2.

The test analysis of water is summarised inTable 3.7 of EIA report.

(xvi) Study on the existing flora and fauna in the The details of flora and fauna are given in

S.No TOR Referencestudy area (10km) carried out by aninstitution of relevant discipline and the listof flora and fauna duly authenticatedseparately for the core and buffer zone anda statement clearly specifying whether thestudy area forms a part of the migratorycorridor of any endangered fauna. If thestudy area has endangered flora andfauna, or if the area is occasionally visitedor used as a habitat by Schedule-I fauna,or if the project fallswithin 15 km of an ecologically sensitivearea, or used as a migratory corridor thena comprehensive Conservation Planshould be prepared and submitted withEIA-EMP Report and comments from theCWL W of the State Govt. also obtainedand furnished.

Chapter-4.Section 4.3 covers the floral details in coreand buffer zone. Likewise, the faunal detailsare presented in Section 4.4.The project does not fall within 15 km ofecologically sensitive area. The ConservationPlan for Schedule-I faunal species is enclosedas Appendix-VI.

(xvii) Details of mineral reserves, geologicalstatus of the study are and the seams to beworked, ultimate working depth andprogressive stage-wise working schemeuntil end of mine life shouldbe reflected on the basis of the approvedrated capacity and calendar plans ofproduction from the approved Mining Plan.Geological maps and sections should beincluded. The progressive minedevelopment and Conceptual-Final MineClosure Plan should also be shown infigures.

The details of progressive mine development,conceptual Mine plan is given in Chapter-2and Chapter-7 of the EIA Report.

Geological Reserves 56.36 million tonne(provided)

Mineable Reserves 37.51 million tonne(pre-mining)

Balance ExtractableReserves(01.04.2014)

26.032 million tonne(95% Recovery)

No of Lignite seams 1-5 (3 horizon)Ultimate WorkingDepth (Sub Blockwise)

Giral Sub Block-50 mJalelo Sub block-65 mThumbli Sub block-85 m

A copy of approved Mine Plan is enclosed,However Mine Closure Plan has been re-submitted to Ministry of Coal vide letter dated13.06.2014 and approval is awaited.Appendix – VI-A

(xviii) Details of mining methods-technology,equipment to be used, etc., rationale forselection of that technology andequipment proposed to be used vis-a-visthe potential impacts

Section 2.4 describes the miningmethodology. The other mine details are givenin Chapter-2 of the EIA Report.

(xix) Impact of mining on hydrology,modification of natural drainage, diversionand channelling of the existingrivers/water courses flowing though theML and adjoining the lease/project andthe impact on the existing users andimpacts of mining operations thereon.

Section 5.4 of Chapter-5 deals with theimpacts on water environment. The ultimatedepth of Mining in Thumbli sub block shall be85 meter and will be reached at the end of 25th

year of Mine life. As the water level is rangingfrom 90-110 m bgl, therefore there will not beintersection of groundwater table and henceno impact for groundwater. Impact on thedrainage pattern are also not expected, asdescribed in Section 3.6 of Chapter-3 of EIAReport. There is no prominent drainage

S.No TOR Referencepattern existing in the area.

(xx) Detailed water balance should be provided.The breakup of water requirement for thevarious mine operations should be givenseparately.

The breakup of water requirement is given inTable-5.11 of Chapter-5.Water Balance diagram is given in Appendix-VII.

(xxi) Source of water for use in mine,sanction of the competent authority inthe State Govt. and impacts vis-a-visthe competing users.

Water requirement is met from the waterreservoir of Giral Thermal power Plant whichreceives water from IGNP (Mohangarh Head)through pipe line. Sanction letter of IGN Deptt,Govt. Of Rajasthan for allocation of water isgiven in Appendix-VIII.

(xxii) Impact of mining and water abstraction usein mine on the hydrogeology andgroundwater regime within the core zoneand 10 km buffer zone including long?termmodelling studies on Details ofrainwater harvesting and measures forrecharge of groundwater should bereflected in case there us a declining trendof groundwater availability and/or if thearea falls within dark/grey zone.

No groundwater abstraction is envisaged inGiral lignite mine.The depth of mining shall be upto 85 m(Thumbli sub-block) at the end of 25th year ofmine life As water table is ranging between90-110 m. Hence, there will be no intersectionof groundwater table. The impact ongroundwater is described in Section 5.4 onpage no. 5-10 of the EIA Report.

Impact of blasting, noise and vibrations. Impact on Noise environment is described inSection-5.3 of the EIA Report

(xxiii) Impacts of mining on the AAQ, predictivemodelling using the ISCST-3 (Revised) orlatest model.

Impact on Air environment is described inSection-5.2 of the Report.

(xxiv) Impacts of mineral transportation? withinand outside the lease/project along withflow-chart indicating the specific areasgenerating fugitive emissions. impacts oftransportation, handling, transfer of mineraland waste on air quality, generation ofeffluents from workshop. Management planfor maintenance of HEMM, machinery,equipment. Details of various facilities tobe provided in terms of parking, rest areas,canteen, and effluents/pollution load fromthese activities.

Impacts on mineral transportation are given insection-5.2 of EIA Report.Flow chart for transport of Lignite is givenbelow

ROM(ex-pit)

By Dumpers By Trucks80% 20%

To Giral Power plant To Buyers125 MW of RVUNL (Mercantile

Sale to Industries)

(xxv) Details of waste generation? OB, topsoil?as per the approved calendar programme,and their management shown in figures aswell explanatory chapter with tables givingprogressive development and mine closureplan, green belt development, backfillingprogramme and conceptual post miningland use. OB dump heights and terracingshould based on slope stability studies witha max of 28° angle as the ultimate slope.

The details of waste generation, overburdenand topsoil is given in Table-7.10 andmanagement of the same is given in Sections7.5 and 7.6 of Chapter-7 of the EIA Report.

S.No TOR ReferenceSections of dumps (ultimate) (bothlongitudinal and cross section) with relationto the adjacent area should be shown.

(xxvi) Progressive Green belt and afforestationplan (both in text, figures as well as intables prepared by MoEF&CC) andselection of species (local) for theafforestation/plantation programme basedon original survey/land use.

The details of afforestaion and green beltdevelopment are given in Table-7.14 ofChapter-7 of EIA Report.

(xxvii) Conceptual Final Mine Closure Plan, postmining land use and restoration ofland/habitat topre- mining. A Plan for the ecologicalrestoration of the area post mining-and forland use should be prepared with detailedcost provisions. Impact and managementof wastes and issues of rehandling(wherever applicable) and backfilling andprogressive mine closure and reclamation.

The Conceptual Mine Closure Plan is given inChapter-7 of the EIA Report.

Post-Mining Landuse and Reclamation Area (ha)S.No

Land UseduringMining

Land Use(ha)Plantation Water

bodyPublicUse

Undisturbed Others Total

1 External OBdump

133.31 - - - 133.31

2 Excavation 888.20 212.57 - - 1100.77

3 Top soil dump 12.00 - - - 12.00

4 Green Beltarea

75.00 - - - 75.00

5 Infrastructure - - 3.51 - - 3.51

6 Power plant - - - - 125.0 125.007 ETP - - - - 1.00 1.008 Undisturbed

area- - - 1205.12 - 1205.12

9 Total 1108.51 212.57 3.51 1205.12 126.0 2655.70

(xxviii) Flow chart of water balance. Treatment ofeffluents from workshop, township,domestic wastewater, mine waterdischarge, etc. Details of STP in colonyand ETP in mine. Recycling of water to the,max. possible extent.

The water requirement is given in section-5.4and water balance diagram is enclosed asAppendix-VII.

(xxix) Occupational health issues Baseline dataon the health of the population in theimpact zone and measures foroccupational health and safety of thepersonnel and manpower for the mine.

Impacts on labour due to mining is coveredunder section 5.3 and Management measuresare suggested in Section 6.3 of the EIAReport.

(xxx) Risk Assessment and DisasterPreparedness and Management Plan.

Disaster Management Plan is given in Chapter-8 of the EIA report.

S.No TOR Reference(xxxi) Integrating in the Env. management Plan

with measures for minimising use ofnatural resources - water, land, energy,etc.

EMP is enclosed as Chapter-6 of EIA Report.

(xxxii) Including cost of EMP (capital andrecurring) in the project cost and forprogressive and finalmine closure plan.

The EMP cost Rs.13.92 Crores and recurringcost is Rs. 4.16 lakh/year (for implementationof Environmental Monitoring Programme). Thedetails of Environmental Management Planand Environmental Monitoring Programme aregiven in Chapters 6 and 9 respectively of theEIA Report. The summary of Cost Estimatesis given in Table-11.1.

(xxxiii) Details of R&R. Detailed project specificR&R Plan with data on the existing socio-economic status of the population(including tribals, SC/ST, BPL families)found in the study area and broad plan forresettlement of the displaced population,site for the resettlement colony, alternatelivelihood concerns/employment for thedisplaced people, civic and housingamenities being offered, etc and costsalong with, the schedule of theimplementation of the R&R Plan.

R & R is not involved, as the proposedscheme is renewal of mine lease sought underthe EIA notification of September 14, 2006and its subsequent amendments. Noadditional land acquisition is envisaged in thepresent proposal.

(xxxiv) CSR Plan along with details of villages andspecific budgetary provisions (capital andrecurring) for specific activities over the lifeof the project.

An amount of Rs. 50 lakh is earmarked forimplementation of various works under CSR.Please refer page 7-22 and 10-3 of the EIAreport. The exact details of villages andactivities to be covered shall be finalized inconsultation with concerned Panchyats.

(xxxv) Public Hearing should cover the details ofnotices issued in the newspaper,proceedings/minutes of public hearing, thepoints raised by the general' public andcommitments- made by the proponentshould be presented in a tabular form: Ifthe Public Hearing is in the regionallanguage, an authenticated EnglishTranslation of the same should beprovided.

The details of Public hearing are enclosed asAppendix- IX and X.Appendix IX refers to Paper Advertisements inEnglish and Hindi Newspapers( in all editions)The details of Proceeding of Public Hearingissued by RSPCB are annexed asAppendix-X.

(xxxvi) In built mechanism of self-monitoring ofcompliance of environmental regulations.

The Monitoring Programme is outlined inChapter-9 of the EIA Report.

(xxxvii) Status of any litigations/ Court casesfiled/pending on the project

Nil

(xxxviii) Submission of sample test analysis of:Characteristics of coal - this-includesgrade of coal and other characteristics?ash, Sand heavy metals including levelsofHg, As, Pb, Cr etc. .

Quality of lignite is described in Section-2.3 ofChapter-2 of EIA Report (Refer Table-2.4 and2.5). However recent test analysis of Lignite isgiven in Appendix -XI

(xxxix) Copy of clearances/approvals? such asForestry clearances, Mining Plan Approval,NOC from Flood and Irrigation Dept. (ifreq.), etc. wherever applicable.

The copy of prior approval of CentralGovernment for grant of mining lease isenclosed as Appendix-XII. The copy of NOCfrom Forest Department is enclosed asAppendix-XIII.

S.No TOR Reference(xxxx) Corporate Environment Responsibility:

a) The Company must have a well laid down Environment Policy approved bythe Board of Directors.

b) The Environment Policy must prescribe for .standard operatingprocess/procedures to bring into focus any infringements/ deviation/violation of the environmental or forest norms/conditions.

c) The hierarchical system or Administrative Order of the company to dealwith environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with theenvironmental clearance conditions must be furnished.

d) To have proper checks and balances, the company should have a well laiddown system of reporting of non-compliances/violations of environmentalnorms to the Board of Directors of the company and/or shareholders orstakeholders at large.

The company’s Corporate Environment Responsibility Policy is enclosed inAppendix-XIV.

akh

Typewritten text

APPENDIX- I

APPENDIX -VI

CONSERVATION PLAN FOR FLORAL (ENDANGERED /THREATENED) SPECIESThe strip mining would remove species growing in the core zone. It is therefore, important to

preserve unaffected land masses in the core zone to preserve seed bank in the soil. This will

ensure in situ conservation for endangered species of Tecoma undulata (locally known as

Rohida) in the buffer zone of project area. However, special habitats have to land marked for

this purpose wherever possible in the buffer zone.

Predominant wind direction from May to September (most windy period) is from south west

direction. And therefore, the south-west location in the Buffer zone will be least affected by

windblown Suspended Particulate Matters from mining operation, power plant etc. Therefore,

the least affected area (Buffer zone) shall be used for conservation of flora and fauna. The

conservation site shall be >500m apart both from mining site and power plant which shall have

a thick green belt to minimize pollution at the proposed conservation site.

About five hectare area will be used for conservation of endangered (Tecoma undulata) and

other associated plant species with plantation density of 300- 400 sapling/ha.

Steps for conservation of endangered/threatened flora Nursery Preparation

It is recommended that a nursery with shade nets, proper irrigation sprinklers and sapling

storage system be set up in 0.5 ha area prior to commencement of mining. The

saplings/cuttings of threatened and endangered species may be raised from seeds/shoots

growing naturally in the core and buffer zones. After one year of hardening, they shall be

planted at the designated site. These species may also be planted at the reclaimed site.

It is also recommended that native trees (Prosopis cineraria, Salvadora oleoides, Acacia

nilotica, Acacia Senegal and Tecomella undulata) and shrubs (Capparis, Leptadaenia,

Crotalaria) will be planted in the reclaimed mine area. Saplings/cuttings of these species may

also be raised in the nursery. The density of trees and shrubs may range between 200 plants /

ha to a maximum of 400 plants /ha. These figures are based on the basis of natural density of

tall shrubs and trees that varies from 30 – 100 plants/ha on different habitats in core and buffer

zones.

The expertise and infrastructural facilities of the State Forest Department who have mastered

the art of raising endangered and threatened species in their high tech nurseries at a very

reasonable cost to promote afforestation and biodiversity conservation in the state shall be

utilized. The saplings/cuttings of native trees and shrubs are also easily available with them.

Time of PlantationRainy season is most appropriate for sowing seeds of grasses and planting saplings raised in

the nursery/purchased from the State Forest Department. Hence pre-plantation preparation

shall begin in March- April. After fencing, pits shall be dug and filled in with potting mixture prior

to rains. It is recommended to use sandy alluvial soil excavated during mining in core zone in

preparation of potting mixture to ensure good rooting medium in the gravelly habitats.

Immediately after first shower, saplings/cutting of endangered and threatened species shall be

planted in the pits along with native species of trees and shrubs. The recommended plant to

plant distance is about 4-5 m while row to row distance is 9-10m. Natural succession of desired

grass species is a very slow process in arid regions. The suitable option is reseeding of space

between tree /shrub rows with pre-soaked seeds of Lasiurus sindicus, Cenchrus setigerus, C.

cilliaris, Panicum antidotale and Dichanthium annulatum in paired rows on raised bunds and

pasture legumes in the furrows. Eleusine compressa is the most appropriate species in gravelly

habitats of conservation site. Thus, overall aspection of vegetation at the reclaimed site would

be almost similar to a natural site within 10-15 years.

Fencing and MaintenanceThe protection of conservation sites is essential from stray animals as well as humans, in order

to allow saplings/cuttings to grow without any disturbances. The weeds should be removed

periodically from the pits. Regular watering at fortnight intervals is essential during first three

months of plantation followed by monthly interval for four years to ensure good growth and

rooting that enable plants to become independent.

Schedule Activities Raising of saplings/cuttings in the nursery one year in advance of plantation schedule.

Contacting with high tech nurseries of the State Forest Department for supply of

saplings/cuttings, as an alternate source.

Digging of pits and their filling with pot mixture (mixture of sandy alluvial soil and

compost) in April-June.

Fencing of sites

Plantation of one year old saplings after first shower

Sowing of other associated plants including grasses in the rainy season

Regular watering at fortnight intervals in the first three months followed at monthly

intervals for three years.

Deweeding and soil loosening (by hoe) of pits, every year for three years.

Pruning of lowermost branches of trees to grow them straight.

The proposed plan for the formation, development and upkeep of the area which includes

demarcation and layout dividing the area in sub-plots and their semi permanent demarcation in

field and preparation of map and layout of excavation of pits where necessary, fencing,

construction of permanent boundary gate, construction of water tank and guzzler and one meter

wide paths/tracks in the area, construction of jhopa, plantation of various floral species including

thor, labour for day to day maintenance and provision for watering of plants shall be done.

The estimated cost for conservation of endangered flora will be around Rs. 1.67 lakhs/yr. The

total cost for seven years including 10% escalation per year shall be Rs. 16.0 Lakhs. The details

are given in Table-1

Table-1 : Budgetary Provision for Conservation Plan for floral speciesS.N. Activity Budget

(Rs. lakh/yr.)1 Purchase of tools and equipments 0.152 Weeding during rain 0.103 Replanting new trees and grass in place of dead ones 0.104 Labor salary appointed for maintenance (one person) 0.725 Expert visit to the site twice a year 0.206 Watering for plants 0.057 Fencing of planted area 0.158 Miscellaneous expenditure 0.20

Cost for one year 1.67Cost for 7 years (including 10% escalation/yr) 15.84 lakh say 16.0 lakh

WILDLIFE CONSERVATION PLAN21 mammalian species reported from the area are widely or sparsely distributed not only in the

study area, but also throughout their distributional range including district Barmer. However, the

complete assessment of the impact of the lignite mining on the Chinkara, Desert Fox, Spiny

Tailed Lizard and Monitor Lizards is an important aspect for formulating the strategies of

conservation through various measures listed in the following paragraphs:

Rehabilitation of the existing populations of above species, if any, from the proposed

lignite mining lease areas to the suitable adjoining or surrounding habitats preferably

under the supervision of experts.

For rehabilitation of Desert Monitor and Desert Fox, if any, just before the

commencement of digging-operation in a particular mining-patch, a thorough search for

all the active dens of these species is recommended, particularly for young ones.

Since, it is proposed to transport the lignite from mining-pit to the power plant with help

of a conveyer-belt at the ground level, it is suggested that the belt should be laid high

enough, at sufficient number of places, to provide gates for free movements of wild

animals resulting in continuity of the fragmented patches created by mining activities.

Restoring of destroyed habitat is recommended immediately after completion of the

mining process.

Measures for Avi-fauna

As such there is no water body in the core area hence no direct impact of mining on the

wetland and its birds. However, there are few water bodies in the buffer zone as well as on

the periphery of the study area therefore, from the bird's point of view; the following

measures have been recommended:

As water bodies in the Buffer Zone attracts many migratory species of birds from the

northern latitudes where they breed, predominated by the members of duck family (both

in diversity as well as in numbers). The proposed mining activities may affect the

continuous arrival of these migratory birds. Therefore, all the ponds (water bodies)

available in the project area should not only be maintained throughout the year, but also

may be improved. This will not only help the sustenance and survival of water birds, but

also will help in arresting the decreasing trend of several water bird species along with a

variety of aquatic biodiversity.

For terrestrial birds, the efforts should be directed in restoring the existing native

vegetation of the project area simultaneously, once the mining process is over for the

purpose.

Safeguards during MiningDuring mining phase, following measures have been suggested:

Strict restrictions shall be imposed on the workers at mining to ensure that they

do not harvest any species/produce from the nearby vegetation cause any

danger or harm to the animals and birds in the area.

The interference of human population would be kept to a minimum in the

adjacent vegetation and it would be ensured that no settlements are set-up in the

vicinity of tree cover or area with vegetation.

Only well maintained/new equipment that produces lesser noise would be

installed at the mining sites.

The best way to control the noise is at source. Certain equipment that needs to

be placed permanently at one place like generators, etc. would be housed in

enclosed structures to cut off the noise.

Traffic (trucks, etc.) used by the project works will be managed to produce a

smooth flow instead of a noise producing stop and start flow.

Necessary training/orientation will be provided to the traffic operators/drivers.

Sounding of loud horns, etc. should be banned.

Project authorities will use water sprinklers on the road to avoid the dust from

construction activities.

Improvement of HabitatsVarious measures recommended for improvement of habitats are:

Fodder and wild fruit plantation for wild animals and for roosting, breeding and hiding

cover for migratory birds etc.

Annual bird count of birds by involving locals and bird experts

Removal of weeds and rehabilitation with local fruit bearing species in the area.

Education and awareness programmes for labour, mine staff and locals.

An amount of Rs.50.0 lakh has been earmarked for this purpose. The details are given in Table-

2

Table-2:Cost of habitat improvement for Improvement of Habitats of faunal speciesS. No. Items of Expenditure Amount (Rs. lakh)1. Fodder and wild fruit plantation for wild animals and for

roosting, breeding and hiding cover for birds etc.20.0

2. Annual bird count of by involving locals and bird experts. 10.03. Removal of weeds and rehabilitation with local fruit bearing

species in gaps.15.0

4 Education and awareness programmes for labour, mine staffand locals

5.0

Total 50.0

APPENDIX-VII

Water Balance Diagram

IGN Dept.

Total Water Requirement

190 m3/day

Drinking Water5 m3/day

Colony150 m3/day

Dustsuppression/Plantation

35 m3/day

GWNil

akh

Typewritten text

APPENDIX - VIII

akh

Typewritten text

APPENDIX - XI

APPENDIX -XIVRajasthan State Mines & Minerals Ltd.

11.2 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT POLICY

To ensure continuous improvement in the overall environmental performance,RSMML has focused its attention towards integration of environmental strategy intheir overall management system.

RSMML, in accordance with National Environment Policy, will build amanagement system for environmental protection, including acquisition ofcertification under the International Standard ISO:14001 and through internalenvironmental assessment system, resulting in improved waste management,water & electricity conservation, noise reduction, control of stack and fugitiveemissions, improved housekeeping, improved work zone ambience, etc.

The company believes that good Health, Safety and Environmental performanceis an integral part of efficient and profitable business management and thesematters rank equally in importance with other management responsibilities andthat success in these areas depends in the involvement and commitment ofeveryone in the organization.

As a consequence to the Company’s overall commitment to preserve Health,Safety, and a Sound Environment the company has a responsibility to:

1. Provide and maintain healthy and safe working conditions, equipmentand systems of work for all employees.

2. Ensure the protection of the health and safety of people who may beaffected by its constructions.

3. Prevent, or if that is not practicable, minimize and make safe releasesto air, water and land of substances which could adversely affecthuman health or the environment.

4. Reduce waste and source by careful use of materials, energy and otherresources and maximize recycling opportunities.

5. Set targets for improving health and safety at work and environmentalprotection, carry out regular assessments and report annually onperformance.

6. Ensure that each of its locations adopts policies and commitments whichalso describe the local organization and arrangements for putting theminto practice.

7. The Company regards Health, Safety and Environmental matters asmainstream management responsibilities.

8. Executive and the line managers at all levels within the company aredirectly responsible through the normal management structure for Health,Safety and Environmental matters in the operations undertheir control.

9. All employees have a responsibility to take reasonable care of themselvesand others while at work and to participate positively in the task of preservingworkplace health and safety and a sound environment.

11.2.1 EHS (Environment, Health & Safety) Policy

The EHS Policy shall be developed and implemented based on the Environment,Health & Safety risks and concerns envisaged in the engineering, procurement &construction activity of the project.

RSMML is committed towards attaining total satisfaction of customers andinterested parties, and achieving business excellence through:

1. Producing and supplying quality products conforming to customerrequirements.

2. Promoting an environmentally responsible, safe and healthy work cultureby actively working towards prevention of environmental pollution,occupational health and safety hazard.

3. Complying with applicable legal and other requirements pertaining toproducts, environmental protection, occupational health and safety.

4. Focusing on continual improvement of processes and performance.5. Ensuring involvement of employees at all levels by providing training &

awareness.6. Minimizing the wastes through efficient use of resources.7. Evaluating effectiveness of Integrated Management System through

regular audits and management reviews.

RSMML has well laid Standard Operating Procedures to bring in any deviation /violation of the environment norms as prescribed. The reporting mechanism isbuilt in Environmental Management System is described in environmentManagement Plan.

As can be seen above, the Company has a well laid down Environment Policywhich will be got approved by the Board of Directors for the proposed projectwhich will prescribe to the following:

Standard operating process/ procedures to bring into focus any infringements/deviation/ violation of the environmental or forest norms/ conditions.

The hierarchical system or Administrative Order of the company to deal withenvironmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmentalclearance conditions must be furnished.

Proper checks and balances in a well laid down system of reporting of non-compliances/ violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of thecompany and/or shareholders or stakeholders at large.


2-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-2MINE DESCRIPTION

2.1 CURRENT STATUS OF MINEAs per the status on 31.3.2014, extractable reserves in Giral mine are 26.032 million tonnes. Till

31.03.2014, almost 9.71 million tonne of lignite had been extracted. The details are given in

Table 2.1. The balance reserves are given in Table-2.2 and the remaining life of the mine shall

be 27 years. Present Surface Plan is enclosed as Figure-2.1

Table- 2.1: Details of lignite and OB production at Giral lignite mine (combined for allpits) since inception to till 31-03-2014

Period Lignite (MT) OB (Mcum)1995-96 0.06 1.791996-97 0.10 1.861997-98 0.18 2.791998-99 0.25 3.521999-00 0.22 2.532000-01 0.22 1.232001-02 0.28 1.882002-03 0.47 4.732003-04 0.57 6.36Sub-Total (1995-2004) (A) 2.35 26.692004-05 0.55 5.522005-06 0.59 7.222006-07 0.30 6.572007-08 0.53 7.032008-09 1.00 8.632009-10 1.00 10.132010-11 0.88 12.112011-12 0.96 9.612012-13 0.92 7.282013-14 0.63 7.10Sub-Total (2004-2014) (B) 7.36 81.2Total 9.71 107.89


2-2WAPCOS Limited

Table-2.2: Status of mineable balance reserves as on 31.03.2014, Giral Lignite Mines,Barmer

Name of theblock

Balance economicreserves as on 31st

March 2004 (MT) as perapproved Mining plan

(Nov 2004 version)

Extractable Reservesafter considering 5%

mining losses(95% of column 2)

Extractedreserves upto

31st March2014 (MT)

Balanceextractable

reserves as on31st March 2014

(MT)Giral 13.67 12.986 4.85 8.136Jalilo 13.59 12.91 2.51 10.40

Thumbli 7.89 7.496 0 7.496Total 35.15 33.392 7.36 26.032

2.2 MINE DETAILSThe lease area of Giral Lignite Mine has a more or less flat topography, with a gradual gradient

towards south-west. Dunes of low relief exist in the area. Dunes are located mainly in the non-

mineralised area. The land over mining is being proposed has scarce vegetation.

The gross geological reserves have been estimated as 56.368 million tonnes of which mineable

reserve have been estimated as 37.51 million tonnes. The range of overburden thickness

including inter-burden is 40 – 75 m. The range of thickness of lignite seams is 0.3 – 3.20 m.

The landuse details for opencast mine project is given in Table-2.3

Table-2.3: Landuse details for opencast project.S.No Land Use Within ML Area (ha) Outside ML

Area (ha)Total

1 Agricultural Land 1975.04 - 1975.042 Forest land - - -3 Wasteland 142.88 - 142.884 Grazing land 471.41 - 471.415 Surface water bodies 3.685 - 3.6856 Settlements 41 - 417 Others (Specify) 21.685 - 21.685

Total 2655.7 - 2655.7Revenue Plan is enclosed as Figure-2.1- A

2.3 QUALITY OF LIGNITEPhysically appearance of the lignite is found very dull and compact and lignite is disintegrated

due to loss of moisture when it is exposed on the surface. Total 242 no. of lignite samples were

analysed by MECL. A study of analytical results received from MECL has revealed ranges of

various parameters are given in Table-2.4.

Table-2.4: Ranges of characteristics of LigniteParameter Range

Minimum MaximumMoisture (%) 24 42Ash (%) 10 40


2-3WAPCOS Limited

Parameter RangeMinimum Maximum

Volatile Matter (%) 16 30Fixed Carbon (%) 14 30Calorific Value (Kcal/Kg) 2010 4060

The proximate analysis of few lignite samples of Giral and Jalilo block were analysed which give

idea of the quality of coal in these two blocks. The arithmetic means of all the parameters from

available analytical data from MECL is given below for Giral, Jalilo &Thumbli. The details are

given in Table-2.5.

Table-2.5: Characteristics of lignite samples of various mining blocksBlock Moisture (%) Ash (%) Volatile Matter

(%)Fixed

Carbon (%)Calorific Value

(Kcal/Kg)Giral 33.59 23.98 21.92 16.69 2588Jalilo 31.78 22.99 23.73 22.12 2797Thumbli 32.30 18.48 20.96 21.21 2705

2.4 MINING METHODThe mine is proposed to be worked by mechanized opencast mining method by deploying

hydraulic excavators, dozers, dumpers (haulers) and ancillary equipment like motor grader,

wheel loader, water sprinkler etc. The overburden in the mine shall be handled by 3.5-3.8 m3

bucket capacity hydraulic excavator with matching 25-35 tonnes rear dumpers. Lignite

extraction is proposed to be done by excavator of 0.9 m3 bucket capacity backhoe for lignite

seam with a thickness of 0.3 m and above and loaded directly into trucks.

The overburden strata is soft and clayey in nature, doesn’t require any blasting, can be directly

dug and loaded into dumper by hydraulic excavator of adequate capacity. The excavated

overburden shall be stacked at proposed waste dump site, which is at minimum lead of 1 to 1.5

km from bottom most R.L. of the pit. Overburden shall be dumped 15-20 m ahead of the dump

edge. The dumped overburden before edge of waste dump shall be pushed down the edge by

adequate size of dozer as proposed which eliminates extra manpower as authorised spotters at

dump and make dump as an accident free area. At dump always one way traffic of dump truck

is proposed as a safe practice by providing fix routes to all directions from top edge of ramp.

In earlier mines, it has been a general practice to develop garland drain around the mine area,

to drain out the run off. However, in a separate study conducted by Central Mining Research

Institute (CMRI), Dhanbad, it has been found that garland drains allow seepage of water into the

mine through slope, which leads to premature failure of the slopes. It has been recommended

that the mine profiling should be done in such a manner by making bund (elevated ground) to


2-4WAPCOS Limited

prevent seepage into the mine. The water so collected can be stored in a pond, which can be

utilised for the sprinkling of mine roads and other areas to prevent the entrainment of fugitive

emissions.

The haul roads and ramps proposed shall be regularly graded by road grader as, mine haul

road bears 20-25% of the total production cost; all haul roads including mine ramps shall be

maintained by road graders giving proper chamber to easy draining out of rainy water.

It is strongly recommended not to allow any hauler (dumpers) movement during rain on road.

Traffic on haul road shall be started after drying of the road. It is worth keeping such practices in

mine of high productivity as once haul roads spoils, lot of production loss will be there due to

time loss in clearing of help up trucks and repairing of road etc.

A garland drain is proposed all around the mine and waste dump to collect surface runoff water,

taking to a common storage pond which can be utilised for water sprinkling purpose on mine

road.

2.4.1 Initial Mine Cut (IMC)Considering the wind direction of the area and waste dump site, the initial mine cut (IMC) has

been proposed in the south-west part of Jalilo block near to the proposed waste dump site, by

driving down a ramp from surface at 1 in 16 gradient by back hoe excavator. After attaining a

depth of 6 m and advancing sufficiently in all three directions of first 6 m bench immediately next

bench starts by driving down the same ramp and so on. The initial mine cut will be converted

into main ramp approaching 159 m RL at the end of first year. The details of ramp are as given

below.

Width of ramp - 20 mGradient - 1 in 16Length of ramp - 880 m (approx) upto 159 mRL

The same way initial cut of Thumbli block shall be mined.The details of the ramp are:

Width - 20 MGradient - 1 in 16

2.4.2 Bench GeometryAs per recommendation of CMRI bench height is to be kept 3m and working slope of 18° and

overall slope of 26° 30’ i.e.1:3 and 1:2. The bench parameters are proposed as below:

(A) Bench geometry during development

Height of bench - 3 mWidth of bench - 8 mWorking slope - 18° 26’


2-5WAPCOS Limited

(B) Ultimate pit geometry

Height of the bench - 3 mWidth of the bench - 6 mBench angle - 70°Overall slope - 26°30’

For better productivity and safe movement of the equipment and machinery working in

development work, a bench width of 9-10 m has been proposed with a height of 3m. The top

most bench height may vary from 3 to 4m according to the topography of the area.

After advancing of top bench 20-30 m in all directions, immediately next bench will start and so

on all development benches shall move one after another upto bottom most bench of the mine

pit to their respective position of the year as proposed in mining plan. All top benches shall be

proposed to develop by excavator of capacity 3.5 – 3.8 m3 with matching dumpers R 35 and

bottom benches by backhoe of 2.5 -2.8 m3 bucket capacity and 0.9 m3 capacity.

2.4.3 Bench sizeSince the overburden strata is soft and clayey in nature and of low compressive strength, a

bench height of 3 m is proposed for better stability of benches and to maintain an overall slope

of 26°30’. A bench width of 6 m (edge to edge) is proposed at the ultimate pit position, bench

width below it increase steepness of overall slope, and are liable of failure (collapse) in long

term as considering strength of strata. It is also proposed to smoothen the sharp corners and

edges of benches, as these are liable to failure due to high concentration of stresses over there.

2.4.4 Sequence of operation (working)a. Giral Mine PitThe Giral lignite mine pit is in operation since 1995-96. About 2.354 million tones of lignite has

already been mined out till 31.3.2004. During the first five years, mining will advance towards

south and then towards west. The bottom RL of southern wall will be 177 m and 174.3 m on

northern wall. In 6th to 10th year mining shall continue advancing towards east direction. Lignite

seam are deep seated on northern walls as compared to the southern walls. The bottom bench

RL on southern wall is 177 mRLwhere as on northern wall it is 174.3 mRL. The plan showing pit

showing pit position at end of 5th is enclosed as Figure-2.2.

The annual production shall be 3,00,000 t with generation of 39.5 lakh m3 overburden. The

overburden removed during the period is proposed to be backfilled in decoaled area on western

side.

b. Jalilo mine PitThe developing benches reach their respective position after extraction of lignite in first year, the

floor of lignite shall be selected as per the bottom most seam and will advance 200 m every


2-6WAPCOS Limited

year for production of 5,00,000 t of lignite. In first year of mining, Jalilo mine pit shall produce

4,00,000 t of lignite and 57,00,000 m3 of overburden. Similarly in 2nd year pit shall be advanced

in north direction where an additional ramp has been proposed from north west direction of

existing main ramp and final mineable boundary of lignite on west side of Jalilo block No 1

which provides approaches to different development benches upto 183 mRL. This reduces the

overall lead to proposed waste dump site and improves the overall productivity of the mine. The

development of bottom benches shall be carried by the main ramp. In 3rd year mine pit shall be

advanced towards east side only from the last lift position of the first year benches where coal

seams are at some what higher depth than first two years of mining. The top four to five

benches shall be developed and overburden shall be hauled to proposed waste dump side

where as bottom benches overburden shall be used as back filling of decoaled area of first year

partially by inside dumping. The same advancing trend will continue in fourth year by positioning

benches to its ultimate pit position and extracting lignite upto mineable east boundary fully.

During fourth year of extraction of lignite one normal fault is encountered, due to which stripping

ratio will increase and 5,00,000 m3 of extra volume of overburden shall be handled in 4th year. In

the same year, one ramp of lignite trucks separately from east side has been proposed, which

approaches bottom most seam of faulted area at 145 mRL to avoid mixing of lignite trucks traffic

with other heavy dumper traffic as a safe practice. 5th year mining will advance towards south

side from last left position of the benches of the fourth year and in initial period of 5th year,

deepest part shall be proposed for mining activity, extracting lignite by reaching east and south

mineable boundary plan and immediately it retreats back towards the remaining western part it

is to be noted that there is not fault anticipated in the area, the deepest level shall be 152 mRL.

A part of the mineable reserve will remain unmined in south west side benches of the fifth year

to mineable boundary of lignite which is proposed to be mined in the initial period of 6th year.

The proposed sequence of mining shall take care of extraction of the lignite in narrow part of the

Jalilo Block No 1 within mineable limit of 1:15 ratio of different boreholes. The plan showing pit

position at end of 5th year is enclosed as Figure-2.3.

c. Thumbli mine pitMining will start by driving down main ramp from surface to 176 mRL from south east to North

West direction. In very first year, mine pit shall advance towards western side taking final

mineable lignite on south side. This will produce 70500 metric tonnes of lignite, and generate

22.5 lakh m3 of overburden. In 2nd year, pit will be advance towards west and north, extracting

mineable boundary on western part and positioning benches of ultimate pit size 3 m by 6 m. The

overburden removal will be 25.0 lakh m3 to produce 2 lakh metric tones of lignite. In 3rd year


2-7WAPCOS Limited

mine pit shall advance towards north direction where lignite seams are at higher depth. Extra

development work shall be required to reach upto a depth of 259 mRL by developing 171 mRL,

165 mRL and 159 mRL benches. In 4th year same trend of mining shall continue by positioning

western side wall benches to ultimate pit size 3 m x 6 m. The bottom most RL in 4th year shall

be 157.5 mRL. Same trend will continue for 5th year by producing 50,0000tonnes of lignite on

removal of 25.00 lakh cm3 of overburden. The plan showing pit showing pit position at end of 5th

is enclosed as Figure-2.4.

The quantum of lignite production and the OB removal proposed during mine life are given in

Table-2.6.

Table-2.6: Details of Lignite Production and Overburden Generation in Giral Lignite Mineas Proposed in approved Mining Plan for 1st 5 Years

Main Block Year Lignite production(lakh tonnes)

Overburden generation(lakh m3)

Strippingratio

Top soil OverburdenJalilo I* 4.0 0.5 56.50 1:14.25

II 5.0 0.5 64.50 1:13.0III 5.0 0.5 64.50 1:13.0IV 5.0 0.5 64.50 1:13.0V 5.0 0.5 64.50 1:13.0

Sub total (I) 24.0 2.5 314.50 1:13.0Giral I* 3.0 0.3 39.20 1:13.6

II 3.0 0.3 39.20 1:13.6III 3.0 0.3 39.20 1:13.6IV 3.0 0.3 39.20 1:13.6V 3.0 0.3 39.20 1:13.6

Sub-Total (II) 15.0 1.5 196.00 1:13.6Thumbli I* 0.70 0.2 22.30 1:32.14

II 2.0 0.2 24.80 1:12.5III 2.0 0.2 24.80 1:12.5IV 2.0 0.2 24.80 1:12.5V 2.0 0.2 24.80 1:12.5

Sub-Total (III) 8.70 1.0 121.50 1:14.08Total (I+II+III) 47.70 5.0 632.0 1:13:25*1st year of approved mining plan (November 2004 Version)

2.4.5 OverburdenThe excavated soil/overburden material will be initially dumped outside the mine limit in an area

of southwest of the mine area which has a capacity to accommodate about 190 lakh m3 of over-

burden. The overburden is proposed to removed by utilizing conventional mining equipments

such as hydraulic shovels, front-end loader with a fleet of dumpers The total target of lignite and

over burden with expanded capacity shall be 10 lakh t /annum and about 135-lakh m3 /annum


2-8WAPCOS Limited

respectively for which suitable high capacity equipment will be adopted particularly overburden

removal.

The overburden removed during this period is proposed to be backfilled in decoaled area.The

actual OB handling shall depend on the depth of lignite seams and may vary accordingly but for

the comfortable situation and balancing the ratio, it is proposed to develop the Giral mine pit by

removing 39.50 lakh m3 of OB every year.

There is one HT electric line passing through the block, which is proposed to be diverted on

back filled area in10th year of Giral block.

2.4.6 Mine Life ( As per approved Mining Plan)The overall mine life shall be 35 years. The amount of development work, lignite production for

entire life of the mine from all three pits is given in Table-2.7. The pit position at the end of the

mine is enclosed as Figure-2.5.

Table – 2.7 :Proposed lignite production & overburden generation as per approvedmining plan

Period Lignite Production(million tones)

Overburden(lakh m3)

Remarks

Upto 5th year 4.77 632.00 Backfilling is proposedfrom 6th year onward.6th – 10th year 5.00 725.00

11th – 15th year 5.00 725.0016th – 20th year 5.00 700.0021st – 25th year 5.00 650.0026th – 30th year 5.00 600.0031st – 35th year 3.68 438.00

Total 33.45 4470.00

2.4.7 OB Waste dumping detailsThe Conceptual mining plan was prepared by considering mine life of 35 years with a lignite

production of 3.0 lakh MT from Giral , 5.0 Lakh MT from Jalela and 2.0 Lakh MT from Thumbli

per annum showing mine configuration at the end of 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th year respectively.

The back filled area was also shown accordingly. The details of overburden generation for first

five years of operation are given in Table-2.8.

Table-2.8: First five year overburden disposal as per approved mining plan (November2004 version)

Year OB (lakh m3) Base area (ha) Height and no. oflift

Remarks

1.Giral BlockFirst year* 39.20 Nil - BackfillingSecond year 39.20 -do-Third year 39.20 Nil - -do-Fourth year 39.20 Nil - -do-


2-9WAPCOS Limited

Year OB (lakh m3) Base area (ha) Height and no. oflift

Remarks

Fifth year 39.20 Nil - -do-Sub Total 196.0 - - -2.Jalilo BlockFirst year 56.50 31.5 7.5m, 3 lifts Ht. 22.5 mSecond year 64.50 27.0 7.5m, 4 lifts Ht. 30.0 mThird year 64.50 15.5 7.5m, 3 lifts Ht 22.5 m*Fourth year 64.50 25.8 7.5m, 4 lifts Ht 30.0 m*Fifth year 64.50 * Back filling proposedTotal 314.50 99.8 Ha3.Thumbli BlockFirst year 22.30 11.0Second year 24.80 5.5Third Year 24.80 5.5Fourth year 24.80 * Backfilling proposed in 2nd yearFifth year 24.80 *Total 121.50 22.0 ha

*1st year means 2004-05

The topsoil stacking is proposed near each block respectively. The height of stack shall be 5.0

m. The quantity and area required for all three topsoil stacks is as given in Table-2.9.

Table-2.9: First five year top soil disposal as per approved mining plan (November 2004version)

Year Topsoil in lakh m3 Area for topsoil (ha)First 1.0 2.4

Second 1.0 2.4Third 1.0 2.4

Fourth 1.0 2.4Fifth 1.0 2.4Total 5.0 12.0

2.4.8 Opencast mineThe mine shall be developed on fully mechanised system of mining by deploying 3.5-3.8 m3

bucket capacity hydraulic shovel with loader bucket. The excavated material shall be loaded into

matching capacity dumper R35 and R25 tonner and directly hauled to proposed site of waste

dump at Jalilo mine pit in first and 2nd year fully and 3rd and 4th year partially, whereas backfilling

of decoaled area commences from 2nd half of 3rd year and in 2nd half of 4th year. From 5th year

onward totally excavated material shall be dumped inside to fill back the decoaled area as

shown in the plans. Backfilling is proposed from second year at Thumbli pit at Giral from first

year itself.


2-10WAPCOS Limited

Lignite of seam thickness above 0.5 m. shall be excavated and loaded by hydraulic excavator of

0.9 m3 bucket capacity (backhoe) directly into lignite dumper of 15 T capacity dispatched to

power generation plant or consumer of the commercial market. The overburden above lignite

seam shall be scrapped by same excavator to keep dilution level minimum. Departmental lignite

loading had been proposed for better control on quality and safety.

2.4.9 Extent of mechanizationOn top benches development work is proposed by 3.8 m3 loader bucket hydraulic excavator and

on lower two benches by 2.8 m3 backhoe hydraulic excavator where as lignite loading is

proposed by 0.9 m3 bucket capacity backhoe hydraulic excavator and 0.9 m3 excavator can also

take care of interburden on lower benches. The details of deployed machines at present is given

in Tables-2.10.

Table-2.10: Details of present deployed machinerySl.No.

Type of Machine Make VolumeCapacity

HP/Specification

Nos. of UnitsDeployed

(a) Machinery of Dholu Construction & Project Ltd. (GB-2 pit)1 Excavator TATA Hitachi-EX-

600-V3.5 Cum 455 1

2 Excavator TATA Hitachi- EX-300 LC

1.7 Cum 230 1

3 Excavator L & T Komatsu-PC200

1.10 Cum 148 3

4 Excavator Volvo-EC 460 3.0 Cum 328 55 Excavator Volvo-EC 290 1.7 Cum 205 26 Excavator Volvo-EC 210 1.1 Cum 159 17 Dumper Volvo-FM-400/340 18/17 Cum 400/340 218 Water Tankers Tata Motors 12 KL 160 29 Diesel Tanker - - 210 Service Van Tata Motors - 211 Dozer BEML-BE-125 - 155 112 Motor Grader SAINY - 190 113 Motor Grader Volvo - 200 114 Tractor Scraper HM - 59 115 Tractor Scraper Massey Ferguson - 65 116 Pick Up Van Tata

407Tata Motors - 30 1

17 Electric Generator Crompton - 40 KVA 118 Electric Generator Canon - 20 KVA 119 Welding Generator SC400 Sup Cha - 40 KVA 120 Air Compressor ELGI - 1430 RPM 1

(b) Machinery of Monte Carlo Ltd. (JaleloPit)


2-11WAPCOS Limited

Sl.No.

Type of Machine Make VolumeCapacity

HP/Specification

Nos. of UnitsDeployed

1 Excavator Volvo-EC 480 3.0 Cum 360 22 Excavator Komatsu-PC 300 2.0 Cum 260 23 Excavator Komatsu-PC 200 1.1 Cum 148 34 Excavator Komatsu-PC 210 1.1 Cum 148 15 Dumper Bharat Benz-3128 18 Cum 275 126 Dumper AMW-2518 15 Cum 176 37 Dumper TATA-2516 15 Cum 160 108 Water Tankers - 20 KL 160 19 Dozer Komatsu-D 39 - - 110 Motor Grader Catter Pillar - - 111 Electric Generator Kirloskar - 5 KVA 2

Haulage and Transport for OverburdenHaulage and transport had been proposed in two parts. For mine development R35 shall meet

out the requirement. For hydraulic excavator of 3.8 m3 capacity R 35T dumpers has been

proposed 3 no/excavator for 2.8 m3 excavator 3 nos. R 35 dumpers per excavator are proposed

for a lead of 1 to 1.5 km. on average.

Transport to Destination

i. Lignite is proposed to be loaded by 0.9 m3 excavator into 15 T. tippers and

directly dispatched to proposed power generation plant of the area or it is

proposed to contract out this work and use trucks /tippers of such a party on

tonnage basis. The loading shall be by departmental excavators or on contract

depends on the option adopted by RSMM Ltd.

ii. For commercial use lignite shall be loaded into consumer trucks by departmental

excavators.

Average daily transportation of lignite to power generation plant shall be 3000 T and 1000 T

daily for commercial sale. Lignite loading facilities shall be provided in day hours only for better

quality control and supervision.

2.4.10 OB waste dumping detailsThere are three outside dumps situated nearby to each other on west side of Giral Block. Since

the beginning of Giral mine block the overburden removed has been stacked at all these three

dumps and partly it has been backfilled in the decoaled area. The waste dump has maximum

height of 22.5 m and two lifts 10 m & 12.5 m. The existing waste dumps cover an area of

354800 m2 with total height of 22.5 m. The details are given in Table-2.11.


2-12WAPCOS Limited

Table-2.11: Overburden dump details of giral block as per approved mining planWaste

dump noVolume (m3) Area of base

occupied (m2)Height/Lift no. Remarks

1. 1272000708750

1980750

12720056700

127200

10 m/ I lift12.5 m/ 2 lift

Total height 22.5 m

2. 1100000998750

2098750

11000079900

110000

10 m/ I lift12.5 m/ 2 lift

Total height 22.5 m

3 1176000 1176001 10 m/ I lift Total height 10mTotal 5255500 m3 345800 m2

2.4.11 MiscellaneousFor a mine of high productivity there are number of miscellaneous activities which are under

operation on regular basis like, road maintenance, bench cleaning, housekeeping generally on

weekly day of rest or as and when required for specific purpose.

Road maintenanceGenerally mine road bears 20-25 % of the total production cost hence it’s become an important

activity to maintain a good haul road for dumpers. A good haul road improves the productivity by

Reducing cycle time of hauler Keeps fuel consumption at optimum level Provides better tyre life

For maintaining a haulage road generally base is built with good soling material of good strength

over which layers of fine aggregates matrix (mixture of morrum as cementing material and – ½”

size gravels) is being used, which provides top wearing surface of road and same is being

replenished weekly or when ever developed on it. To maintain haul roads in good condition and

of desired gradient loader, tippers and motor graders are proposed.

House keepingTo remove rubbish material unnecessary accumulated in the corners, and sides of roads, on top

surface area of mine pit, nearby area of offices and workshop etc. The activity can be organised

with same loader and tippers, graders etc.

Dust SuppressionDust is a big nuisance on mine haul road, and it’s very dangerous for environment point of view;

same shall be suppressed by spraying water by water sprinkler on mine haul road and at tipping

points etc. It is also statutory as per mines regulation to suppress dust at the place of generation

itself. Water sprinklers of 28 KL capacity with spraying water with pressure as well as by gravity


2-13WAPCOS Limited

and in built water pump for self loading are proposed for the activity. The ancillary machines

provided in the Approved Mining plan are given in Table-2.12.

Table-2.12: Ancillary machineries deployed as per approved Mining plan (November 2004version)

S. No. Type Nos. Size/capacity Make Motive Total HP1. Motor grader 4 GD 605-R2 BEML Diesel 5802. Water Sprinkler 4 28 KL BEML Diesel 14203. Dozers 3 D-355 BEML Diesel 12304. Dozers 3 D6H HM/BEML Diesel 3355. Tipper 4 15T TATA Diesel 400

2.4.12 BlastingLignite and strata lying over it are of soft in nature, can easily be dug and excavated by

hydraulic excavator. So no blasting is required.

2.5 PROPOSED RATE OF PRODUCTION, LIFE OF MINE AS PER MINE CLOSUREPLAN (MAY, 2014 VERSION) AND CALENDAR PROGRAMME OF PRODUCTION

The calendar programme of production is given in Table-2.13. The balance life of the mine is 27

years considering 2014-15 as the 1st year as per current Mine Closure plan. However, the life as

per the approved mining plan comes to 35 years considering the 2004-05 as the 1st year of

operation.

Table-2.13: Proposed rate of mineral productionYear Calendar Year Progressive Lignite

Production (MT)Cumulative OB

production(Mcum)

Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 7.5 2710th(Present) 2004-05 to 2013-14 2.3 80

15th 2014-15 to 2018-19 5 7020th 2019-20 to 2023-24 5.0 7125th 2024-25 to 2028-29 5.0 7130th 2029-30 to 2033-34 5.0 7135th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 5.0 7037th** 2040-2041 0.98 14Total 35.7 474

* 34th year end of Giral Pit, 31st year end of Jalilo Pit** 37th year end of Thumbli Pit

2.6 CONCEPTUAL MINING PLANThe Conceptual Mining Plan is prepared by considering mine life of 37 years considering

inception data with a lignite production plan of @10.0 lac MT. The total excavated area shall be

1100.77 ha. The disturbed area will comprise of excavated land, area occupied by


2-14WAPCOS Limited

infrastructure, road etc. The actual land use at the end of 5th year and anticipated conceptual

stage of mining operations is given in Table-2.14. The Conceptual Mine Plan is shown

in Figure-2.5.

Table-2.14:Year / Stagewise Area Excavated during mine life (as per MCP)Year Calendar Year Area excavated (ha)

Progressive Cumulative1. Within ML area

Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 65.73 65.7310th 2004-05 to 2013-14 221.08 286.8115th 2014-15 to 2018-19 238.19 525.0020th 2019-20 to 2023-24 174.98 699.9825th 2024-25 to 2028-29 178.77 878.7530th 2029-30 to 2033-34 104.17 982.9235th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 98.95 1081.8737th** 2040-2041 18.90 1100.77Total 1100.77


Out of total excavated area 1100.77 ha at end of mine, 888.12 ha will be backfilled while the

rest 212.57 ha will remain in the form of a void. In 30th year 6.34 Mcum will be rehandled from

the surface dump to the void area, on 35th year 21.41 Mcum OB will be rehandled to the void

from the surface dump and at the end of mine the remaining 3.24 Mcum from the surface dump

will be rehandled to the void.

The backfilled area will be having varying levels, areas and land usage as shown in the Table-

2.15.

Table-2.15: Details of height of crown dump above ground level at the end of mining/postmine closure stage (as per MCP)

S.No.

Height of crown aboveGround level (m)

Crown dump areaat ground level

Landusage Landusearea (ha)

1 GL 327.50 Agriculture 847.582 15 520.08 Agriculture3 25 13.82 Plantation/Forest 40.544 60 26.72 Plantation/Forest5 Void 212.57

Total 1100.77

2.7 OVERBURDEN DISPOSALThe overburden removed during first five years is being proposed to stacked on outside dump

partly and partly by back filling. There is no overburden stacking outside during the rest of the

years as backfilling is proposed. The details of overburden generation are given in Table-2.16.


2-15WAPCOS Limited

Table-2.16: Details of Overburden Generation during mine life (AS PER MCP)Year Calendar Year OB (B)

McumArea(ha)

OB disposed toSurface Dump (B)

Mcum

OB backfilled(B) Mcum

Prog Cummu Prog ProggSince Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 27 35.48 7.94 18.36

10th 2004-05 to 2013-14 80 62.36 12.49 66.0615th 2014-15 to 2018-19 70 35.47 6.52 61.5720th 2019-20 to 2023-24 71 0 0 70.2925th 2024-25 to 2028-29 71 0 0 70.2730th 2029-30 to 2033-34 71 0 0 70.7135th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 70 0 0 69.0837th** 2040-2041 14 0 0 13.61

Sub Total 474 133.31 26.95 439.95* 34th year end of Giral Pit, 31st year end of Jalilo Pit** 37th year end of Thumbli Pit

2.8 TOPSOIL STACKINGThe topsoil stacking is proposed near each block respectively. The height of stack shall be 5.0

m. The quantity of top soil generated and stacking area required for all three topsoil stacks is as

given below in Table-2.17.

Table-2.17 :Sub-block wise quantity of top soil generated and stacking area requiredBlock Volume (Mcum) Area (ha*)Giral 3.31 5Jalilo 2.78 4.5

Thumbli 1.50 2.5Total 7.59 12.0

* Only part of the volume of the top soil generated will be required to be accommodated inthe stacks while the rest will be either carpeted concurrent with mining or temporarilystacked over the backfilled area before laying over the backfilled area.

2.9 USE OF EXCAVATED LIGNITEThe lignite produced from mine shall be used ei9ther for power generation or consumption by

industries and other demands.

2.10 MANPOWERThe details of presently deployed manpower are given in Tables-2.18 to 2.22.


2-16WAPCOS Limited

Table-2.18: (A) Present manpower of ExecutivesS.No. Designation Manmonths1. Agents (DGM) 1 First Class Coal Certificate holder2. Mines Manager 1 First Class Coal Certificate holder3. Safety officer 1 Second class Coal Certificate holder4. V.T. Officer 1 Second class Coal Certificate holder5. Asst. Manager (Mines) 2 Second class Coal Certificate holders6. Manager (Geology) 17. Asstt. Manager (Geology) 18. Manager (A/C) 19. Asst. Maint. Engineer 110. Medical Office 111. Security Officer 112. Store Officer 113. Asstt. Manager (Survey) 114. Environment manager 1

Total 15

Table-2.19: (B) Present manpower of Office Staff1. Office Asst 52. Cashier 13. Peons 64. Draftsman 15. Survey Assistant 1

Total 14

Table-2.20: (C) Present manpower of Supervisory Staff1. Mine overman 52. Mining Sirdar 53. Mechanical Foreman 14. Electrical Supervisor 25. Compounder 16. Horticulturist 17. Miscellaneous 2

Total 17Grand Total of RSMM (A+B+C) 46


2-17WAPCOS Limited

Table-2.21: (D) Present manpower – OperatorsS.

No.Particulars Contractor Total

Dholu Construction &Project Ltd.

Monte Carlo Ltd.

1. Excavator Operators 13 12 252. Dozer Operators 2 2 43. Grader Operators 2 2 44. Dumper Operators 30 30 605. Sprinkler operator 2 1 36. Diesel Tankers operator 2 1 37. Service van operator 1 0 18. Motor grader operator 1 1 29. Tractor scraper operator 1 0 110. Diesel bouser operator 1 1 211. Fire tender operator 1 0 112. Electric generator operator 2 2 413. Air compressor operator 1 1 214. Light Vehicle Driver 1 1 2

Total 60 54 114

Table-2.22: (E) Present manpower (Others)S.No. Particulars Total1. Mechanics 82. Electrician 23. Auto Electrician 24. Welder 45. Canteen Cook 106. Medical Attendant 27. Turner 28. Plumber 29. Sweepers 210. Security Guards 611. Mazdoors 10

Total 50Grand Total (D+E) 164

Overall strength : 46+164=210


3-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-3ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE STATUS-PHYSICO-CHEMICAL ASPECTS

3.1 INTRODUCTIONThe assessment of pre-project environmental status is essential to determine the environmental

parameters which could be significantly affected due to the proposed project. The baseline

study requires both field work and review of existing documents, which is necessary for

identification of data which may already have been collected for other purposes.

The mine lease area has been considered as the core zone for the EIA study. The study area or

the Buffer Zone proposed for the EIA study is the area within 10 km radius from the periphery of

the proposed lignite mine at Giral. The study area map is enclosed as Figure-3.1.

Figure-3.1: Study Area Map


3-2WAPCOS Limited

The present Chapter deals with the information about the baseline data for physic-chemical

aspects. The data was collected through information obtained from existing documents/

publications pertaining to the study area. The field studies were conducted over a period of

three months from April 2014 to June 2014.

3.2 GENERAL INFORMATIONBarmer is located in the western part of the state forming a part of the Thar Desert. The district

borders Jaisalmer district in the north, Jalore district in the south, Pali district and Jodhpur

district in the east, and Pakistan in the west. The name Barmer is derived from the ruler Bahada

Rao Parmar (Panwar) or Bar Rao Parmar (Panwar) who is said to have founded the town in the

13th century, when it was named Bahadamer. The total area of the district is 28,387 square

kilometers.

3.3 CLIMATEThe project area has a dry climate with large variations in temperature with scanty rainfall. The

climate of the project area can be divided into four distinct seasons. The winter season lasts

from November to March which is followed by summer season from April to June. The rainy

season begins in July and ends by mid-September. The period from mid-September to October

is the post-monsoon season.

Rainfall : The average rainfall in the project area is 262.9 mm. About 71% of annual rainfall is

received under the influence of south-west monsoons. On an average, there are 15.6 rainy days

in a year.

Temperature : The temperature rises rapidly after March. The months of May and June are

hottest with mean daily maximum temperature being 42.0oC. The mean daily minimum

temperatures in the months of May and June are 26.7oC and 27.3oC respectively. The

temperature drops with the advancement of south-west monsoons by mid-July. The withdrawal

of monsoons in the latter half of September leads to a slight increase in the day temperature but

there is a decrease in the night temperature. From November there is a sudden decrease in the

day and night temperatures. The month of January is the coldest with mean daily minimum and

maximum temperatures being 10.0oC and 25.4oC respectively.

Humidity : The humidity in the air is generally low throughout the year except during the rainy

season. The summer months are the driest with relative humidity being as low as 15 to 20%.

Winds : The predominant wind direction during the period from May to September is from

south-west. During the winter season (November to March) winds are generally light in the

morning with predominant direction being between east and south, but in the afternoons, the

direction changes to north-west. In the month of April, the morning winds generally blow from


3-3WAPCOS Limited

south-eastern and western directions while in the afternoons, they blow mostly from directions

between south-west and north-west.

Special weather phenomena: The depressions originating in Bay of Bengal during the south-

west monsoons move in westerly direction and reach the project area district and cause

widespread rains. Occasionally, storms or depressions occur in the post-monsoon season.

Thunderstorms occur during the south-west monsoons. Occasionally, fog also occurs due to

western disturbances in the winter season.

The monthly data on various meteorological parameters and special weather phenomena is

summarized in Tables-3.1 and 3.2 respectively.

Table-3.1: Average meteorological conditions in the project area districtMonth Temperature (oC) Rainfall

(mm)No. ofrainydays

Relative humidity(%)

Windvelocity(km/hr)Maximum Minimum At 8.30 At 17.30

January 25.4 10.6 0.9 0.1 52 29 6.2February 29.0 13.3 1.8 0.2 49 27 6.5March 34.6 19.0 4.6 0.3 44 23 7.9April 39.2 24.4 1.6 0.2 42 23 9.9May 42.0 26.7 7.2 0.5 53 23 12.2June 40.3 27.3 33.2 2.0 67 34 13.1July 36.7 26.4 78.5 4.7 77 50 11.1August 34.9 25.4 84.9 4.6 79 54 9.8September 35.8 24.6 43.3 2.5 74 46 8.2October 36.8 22.1 2.7 0.2 56 31 6.3November 32.1 16.6 3.6 0.2 50 31 5.0December 27.3 12.1 0.6 0.1 53 32 5.7Average 34.5 20.7 58 34 8.5Total 262.9 15.6

Source : IMD

Table-3.2: Special weather phenomena in the project area districtMonth No. of days with

Thunder Hail Dust storm Squall FogJanuary 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.2February 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0March 0.8 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0April 0.5 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0May 1.4 0.0 1.1 0.0 0.0June 2.6 0.0 1.4 0.0 0.0July 4.0 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.0August 3.2 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0September 2.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0October 0.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0November 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0December 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1Total 15.8 0.0 3.9 0.0 0.3

Source : IMD


3-4WAPCOS Limited

3.4 MICRO METEOROLOGYAs a part of study, micro-meteorological station was stationed at village Giral. The monitoring

was done for a period of 12 weeks from April 2014 to June, 2014. The parameters monitored

were:

Temperature Rainfall Humidity Cloud cover

The daily monitoring data is enclosed as Annexure-I. The summary of micro-meteorological

data is given in Table-3.3.

Table-3.3: Temperature and rainfall details in project area districtMonth Mean Temperature (ºC) Rainfall

(mm)Relative Humidity

(%)April 2014 31.7 0.0 29.5May 2014 33.4 0.0 38.1June 2014 35.4 0.0 43.8Average 33.5 0.0 37.1Total 0.0Source: IMD

3.5 TOPOGRAPHYTopographically, existing mining lease area is almost flat terrain, with minor undulation. Three

high grounds are observed in the South-Eastern, Central and North-Western parts of the area

separated by low lying flat area. The reduced level of the area varies between the highest of

235 m and lowest of 208 m sand dunes have bordered the eastern side of the lease area. Small

patches of sand dunes are noticed in the western side. The surface of the area is strewn with

rocky fragments and gravels

3.6 DRAINAGE PATTERNThere are minor natural drains in this area and the natural water courses drain out the water

from the surrounding catchment areas into the ponds. The drains are active in the months of

June, July and August when the monsoon is active. The rainfall is very scanty. As the soil

absorbs very little water, during monsoon, it may be said that the rivers and nallahs are in spate,

depending upon the intensity of the rain. For the rest of the year these remain dry.

Absence of prominent drainage and river is notable in the area but three ponts are observed out

of which one is located near area north east of Jalilo village and the other south and west of

Giral village. The rainfall is very low and the level of ground water is 90-110 m from the surface

and it is under unconfined condition.


3-5WAPCOS Limited

3.7 GEOLOGYGeological Survey of India had first undertaken exploration work for lignite by drilling 68

boreholes in same area of Barmer District during 1982 – 1986. Lignite reserve was estimated

about 8 million tons by GSI. Then, Mineral Exploration Corporation Ltd (MECL) had also carried

out detailed exploration work in the Giral area from March 90 to July 92. Rajasthan State

Mineral Development Corporation Ltd., (now RSMML) Govt. of Rajasthan undertaking, is

extracting lignite of Giral Area. During the course of mining inter spaced drilling have also been

carried out by the RSMDC (RSMM) to assess the geological reserves of lignite.

Strata graphic succession of the rock formation in the Barmer Basin is shown in Table-3.4.

Table-3.4: Geological set-up of the barmer regionAge Formation Details of Litho-units

After GSI After ONGCRecent and sub-

recentBlown sand Blown sand Blown sand with Gypsite and Kankar

------------------------------Unconformity-----------------------------Post Pliocene Kapurdi Kapurdi (30m) Fuller’s earth, clays etc.Mio-Pliocene Mandai Mata ji ki Dhani

(180 m)Sand stone, Ball clay, Conglomeratesetc.

Eocene Alki Alki (280 m) Benthonites, Sandstones, Clay & LigniteCreataceous Barmer Barmer (80 m) Sandstone, Yellow clays silt stone

Fatehgarh Fatehgarh Sandstone, Ochreous clays,conglomereates, Bentonites etc.

------------------------------Unconformity-----------------------------Lower Jurrasics Sornumill (80 m) Sandstone with fossl wood, clayMiddle Jurrasics Lathi Jaisalmer Sandstone, Limestone, Marl,

ConglomeratesPre-Cambrian Malani Suite - Rhyolites, felsites, granites with acid and

basic dykes.

Local Geology of the areaThe geological succession in Giral area is restricted to Akli Formation and the overlying sand

gypsite as shown in Table-3.5.

Table-3.5: Generalised geological sequence recorded in giral blockAge Formation Litho Unit Depth variation (M) with

reference to surfaceNormalDepth

variation (M)Min MaxRecent andsub Recent

Sand andKankar

Aeoline andKankar

0.00 (MT-1)0.50 (MT-21)

19.00 (MT-26)12.00 (MT-25)

0.00-2.002.50-4.50

Post Pliocene Kapurdi Bentonite/Bentonitic clay

0.50 (MT-70) 44.00 (MT-120) 1.00-20.00

Lower Akli Greenish grey 6.00 (MT-15) 145-90 (MT-93) 20.00-30.00Eocene Clay

Carbonaceous 14.00 183.40 (MT.112) 30.00-50.00


3-6WAPCOS Limited

Age Formation Litho Unit Depth variation (M) withreference to surface

NormalDepth

variation (M)horizons (LigniteIntercal & carb Clay)

(MT-111)

Greenish grey clay 17.65(MT-16)

206.90 (MT-112) 50.00-75.00

Glauconiticsand/sandstone

41.20(MT-13)

201.50 (MT-6) 75.00-Onwards

The top most horizons consist of aeolin sand followed by bentonite and variegated clay.

Carbonaceous clay occurs as thin bands intercalated with lignite at various levels. Lignite

seams occurs at various levels, interspersed with greenish-grey or greenish-black clay. The

bottom-most formation consists of glauconitic sandstone throughout the area.

Thus a major portion of all the deposits in the area (as observed in various borehole logs)

belongs to Alki formation of Early Eocene age.

3.8 SEISMICITYThe mine lease area lies in an area where no earthquake of any significance has occurred in

past. The region however, experiences fringe effects of the great Himalayan boundary fault

zone, the Suleman range or the Rann of Kutchh. There is no record of earthquakes having

caused damage to structure in the study area impact. Accordingly to records, maximum seismic

intensity experienced at Bikaner was V on the Modified Mercalli Scale during the earthquakes of

1819 and 1905.

3.9 SOILSThe soils in the project area are more or less sandy in texture except in few villages where it is

loam with shifting sand dunes. Due to scarcity of rains, the vegetative cover on the surface and

organic matter in the soil sis liable to wind erosion, as moisture retentive capacity is nil. As a

part of the EIA study, soil samples were collected during the month of April 2014 from study

area (Buffer zone). The location of soil sampling stations is given in Figure-3.2. The results of

analysis results of soil samples are given in Table-3.6.


3-7WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.2: Sampling Location Map

Table-3.6: Soil quality analysis in the core zone and buffer zoneParameters Mine Lease

AreaKhijarli Aakli Neembasar Rampura

pH 8.17 8.02 8.13 7.82 8.31Bulk Density g/cc 1.46 1.42 1.54 1.55 1.05Electrical Conductivityms/cm

0.179 0.321 0.194 0.191 19.4

Nitrogen % w/w 0.07 0.09 0.12 0.08 0.14


3-8WAPCOS Limited

The soil texture in the area is mainly sandy. The pH is in alkaline range. The salt content in the

soils is moderate. As far as soil nutrients are concerned, the soil productivity in the area can be

categorized as very low to low.

3.10 WATER ENVIRONMENTGround water lies at a depth of 90 to 110 m below the surface and is generally saline. Thus,

groundwater use is quite low in the area. The Consultant has collected water samples from

various locations in the study area (buffer zone) in April 2014, which were analysed and the

results are summarized in Table-3.7. The drinking water quality standards are given in Table-

3.8. The sampling sites are plotted on Figure-3.2.

Table-3.7: Water Quality in the Study Area (Buffer zone)Parameter Mine

LeaseArea

Neembala Aakli Kotra Thoombli

pH 7.35 7.52 7.80 7.35 7.49Temperature, °C 36.7 36.8 36.5 36.3 36.7Electrical Conductivity, µs/cm 3750 346.0 302.0 350 4630Turbidity, NTU <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 6.0Total Alkilinity (as CaCO3), mg/l 262.30 90.90 80.80 60.60 40.40Chlorides, mg/l 961.83 20.25 25.31 25.31 725.59Total Hardness (as CaCO3), mg/l 420 100 110 100 1640Calcium (as Ca), mg/l 109.01 24.04 24.04 24.04 480.96Magnesium(as Mg), mg/l 35.96 9.72 11.66 9.72 106.92Nitrate(as NO3), mg/l 2.88 0.18 0.16 0.18 6.86Sulphates(as SO4), mg/l 293.33 11.90 34.28 49.04 898.57Iron(as Fe), mg/l 0.16 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.18Phosphate(as PO4), mg/l <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04 <0.04Total Silica(as SiO2), mg/l 17.6 2.50 0.10 2.60 3.8BOD (3days at 270C), mg/l 8.0 Nil Nil Nil NilCOD, mg/l 24.54 Nil Nil Nil NilOil & Grease, mg/l <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0 <2.0Total Suspended Solids, mg/l 4.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 10.0Sodium(as Na), mg/l 540.0 15.0 42.0 22.0 148.0Potassium(as K), mg/l 152.0 3.0 8.0 4.0 22.0Phenolic Compounds, (asC6H5OH) mg/l

<0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Arsenic(as As), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01Total Chromium (as Cr), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Phosphate (as P), mg/kg 5.11 18.15 126.53 74.48 2.04Organic matter, %w/w 0.36 0.43 0.38 0.46 1.68Sodium(asNa), mg/kg 111.42 91.80 149.59 116.32 18243.86Potassium(asK), mg/kg 545.52 443.06 617.70 525.59 853.7Texture Loamy Sand Sandy

LoamSandyLoam

SandyLoam

SandyClay


3-9WAPCOS Limited

Parameter MineLeaseArea

Neembala Aakli Kotra Thoombli

Mercury(as Hg), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01Copper(as Cu), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01Zinc(as Zn), mg/l 0.08 0.03 0.02 0.05 0.08Cadmium(as Cd), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01Lead(as Pb), mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01Residual Sodium Carbonate, mg/l 0 0 0 0 0Dissolved Oxygen, mg/l 5.8 6.2 5.8 5.6 5.4Coliform MPN/100ml Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

Table-3.8: Drinking Water Quality StandardsCharacteristics *Acceptable **Cause for RejectionTurbidity (units on JTU scale) 2.5 10Colour (Units on platinum cobalt scale) 5.0 25Taste and Odour Unobjectionable UnobjectionablepH 7.0 to 8.5 <6.5 or >9.2Total Dissolved Solids (mg/l) 500 1500Total hardness (mg/l) (as CaCO3) 200 600Chlorides as CD (mg/l) 200 1000Sulphates (as SO4) 200 400Fluorides (as F) (mg/l) 1.0 1.5Nitrates (as NO3) (mg/l) 45 45Calcium (as Ca) (mg/l) 75 200Magnesium (as Mg) (mg/l)If there are 250 mg/l of sulphates, Mgcontent can be increased to a maximum of125 mg/l with the reduction of sulphates atthe rate of 1 unit per every 2.5 units ofsulphates

30 150

Iron (as Fe) (mg/l) 0.1 1.0Manganese (as Mn) (mg/l) 0.05 0.5Copper (as Cu) (mg/l) 0.05 1.5Zinc (as Zn) (mg/l) 5.0 15.0Phenolic compounds (as phenol) (mg/l) 0.001 0.002Anionic detergents (as MBAS) (mg/l) 0.2 1.0Mineral Oil (mg/l) 0.01 0.3Toxic materials

Arsenic (as As) (mg/l) 0.05 0.05Cadmium (as Cd) (mg/l) 0.01 0.01Chromium (as hexaalent Cr) (mg/l) 0.05 0.05Cyanides (as CN) (mg/l) 0.05 0.05Lead (as Pb) (mg/l) 0.1 0.1Selenium (as Se) (mg/l) 0.01 0.01Mercury (total as Hg) (mg/l) 0.001 0.001Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) 0.2 g/l 0.2 g/l


3-10WAPCOS Limited

Characteristics *Acceptable **Cause for RejectionRadio Activity

Gross Alpha activity 3p Ci/l 3p Ci/lGross Beta activity Pci = pico curie 30p Ci/l 30p (Ci/l)Notes :*1 The figures indicated under the column `Acceptable’ are the limits up to which water is generally

acceptable to the consumers**2 Figures in excess of those mentioned under `Acceptable render the water not acceptable, but still

may be tolerated in the absence of alternative and better source but upto the limits indicated under column“Cause for Rejection” above which are supply will have to be rejected.

*3. It is possible that some mine and spring waters may exceed these radio activity limits and in such cases it isnecessary to analyse the individual radionuclides in order to assess the acceptability or otherwise for publicconsumption.

The water in the area is slightly alkaline as the pH varies from 7.35 to 7.8. The turbidity is quite

low which is normally the case in groundwater or canal water. Hardness level is higher than

permissible limit of 200 mg/l, in ground water but is well within the limits for canal water.

The concentration of heavy metals was well below the detectable limits indicating the absence

of pollution sources. The BOD and COD level are very low except for one location, BOD and

COD levels indicate the absence of pollution sources. The concentration of other parameters,

e.g. mineral oil, Anionic detergents, PAH, oil & grease etc., were well below the detectable limit.

The concentration of heavy metals were well below the permissible limit

3.11 AIR ENVIRONMENTAs a part of the EIA study, an ambient air quality monitoring programme was designed and

implemented. The sampling stations were fixed considering the meteorological conditions. The

data on wind velocity and direction for Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) monitoring

station in district Barmer was collected and wind rose diagram for the months of April, May and

June are enclosed as Figures-3.3 to 3.5. The wind rose diagram for summer season is enclosed

as Figure-3.6.


3-11WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.3: Windrose Diagram for April 2014


3-12WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.4 : Windrose Diagram for May 2014


3-13WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.5: Windrose Diagram for June 2014


3-14WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.6 : Windrose Diagram for summer season (April-June 2014)

As a part of the present EIA study ambient air quality was monitored from April 2014 to June

2014. The prime objective of the ambient air quality monitoring was to assess the existing level

of air pollutant in the study area. The parameters monitored were PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NO2.

The monitoring was conducted at the following locations:

- Giral- Akli- Thumbli- Mine Site

The various ambient air quality monitoring stations are shown in Figure-3.2. The frequency of

monitoring for each station was twice a week for twelve consecutive weeks. The results of


3-15WAPCOS Limited

ambient air quality monitoring are given in Table-3.9. The ambient air quality standards are

given in Table-3.10.

Table-3.9: Ambient air quality monitoring stations in the study area (buffer zone)(Unit: g/m3)

Station NO2 SO2 PM10 PM2.5

Giral01.04.14 22.3 18.4 125 3702.04.14 18.3 17.3 109 3108.04.14 19.2 14.9 118 3509.04.14 17.8 16.3 116 3515.04.14 21.2 16.8 119 3416.04.14 22.2 18.4 124 3822.04.14 17.1 18.8 125 3723.04.14 19.7 17.9 127 3829.04.14 18.5 20.5 121 3530.04.14 22.65 19.7 111 3205.05.14 19.84 18.6 116 3406.05.14 21.4 17.7 116 3412.05.14 19.5 17.3 121 3513.05.14 19.9 15.7 109 3219.05.14 18.6 17.6 119 3320.05.14 19.0 16.4 116 3326.05.14 18.1 16.2 114 3327.05.14 13.8 11.5 96 2902.06.14 19.3 14.2 78 2403.06.14 18.6 16.6 106 3109.06.14 16.3 16.7 103 3110.06.14 15.9 17.2 106 3216.06.14 19.3 17.3 107 3117.06.14 18.5 19.4 112 3523.06.14 17.4 17.8 108 3324.06.14 21.2 18.1 109 32Akli03.04.14 15.5 14.8 87 2704.04.14 18.4 16.2 99 3110.04.14 16.3 17.2 106 3111.04.14 15.4 15.2 96 2817.04.14 17.3 14.8 87 2618.04.14 16.3 16.2 95 2924.04.14 17.7 17.1 111 3325.04.14 14.4 14.8 109 3130.04.14 16.7 15.2 99 2901.05.14 18.3 16.3 104 3207.05.14 17.2 18.2 112 3408.05.14 15.6 14.7 97 3014.05.14 14.8 16.3 88 27


3-16WAPCOS Limited


15.05.14 13.9 14.3 95 3021.05.14 15.8 15.3 102 3122.05.14 16.3 18.5 113 3428.05.14 13.6 13.5 98 3129.05.14 12.9 14.2 104 3204.06.14 14.1 16.6 108 3305.06.14 15.7 16.8 103 3111.06.14 16.8 15.2 95 2912.06.14 16.4 13.7 89 2818.06.14 17.2 14.3 93 2719.06.14 14.8 14.8 101 3025.06.14 14.2 15.7 95 2926.06.14 15.3 16.6 101 31Thumbli01.04.14 13.2 8.3 85 2602.04.14 12.7 6.9 93 2708.04.14 12.2 10.6 84 2609.04.14 14.5 11.1 102 3115.04.14 13.6 9.9 98 3016.04.14 12.8 9.4 89 3022.04.14 12.4 10..5 95 3123.04.14 11.5 11.4 104 3229.04.14 14.7 10.7 89 2730.04.14 13.2 15.2 92 2805.05.14 11.8 9.8 96 2906.05.14 11.9 10.3 87 2712.05.14 12.3 9.3 80 2313.05.14 10.7 9.8 72 2119.05.14 11.4 11.2 78 2420.05.14 12.5 12.1 79 2526.05.14 14.3 10.2 84 2627.05.14 13.7 9.8 79 2302.06.14 12.7 11.9 85 2503.06.14 12.2 11.6 93 2809.06.14 10.5 11.2 82 2510.06.14 12.3 8.9 70 2216.06.14 12.7 11.3 88 2817.06.14 13.8 12.5 96 2923.06.14 11.6 10.2 78 2424.06.14 10.9 7.3 93 27Mine Site03.04.14 12.6 12.8 98 2904.04.14 13.4 14.6 89 2710.04.14 14.7 11.6 104 3111.04.14 14.6 17.2 113 3617.04.14 17.3 14.6 103 32


3-17WAPCOS Limited


18.04.14 18.6 17.7 119 3824.04.14 16.9 14.7 109 3325.04.14 19.4 12.8 121 3930.04.14 18.4 17.5 116 3501.05.14 16.4 17.3 116 3407.05.14 15.7 18.3 98 2908.05.14 17.8 19.5 105 3014.05.14 19.4 20.5 114 3515.05.14 16.3 18.2 95 2821.05.14 15.8 17.1 104 2922.05.14 17.4 16.2 114 3428.05.14 19.5 17.3 105 3129.05.14 18.3 19.4 99 2904.06.14 17.7 20.3 85 2605.06.14 16.9 21.5 92 2811.06.14 16.4 17.2 103 3112.06.14 18.4 16.6 98 3018.06.14 19.2 18.4 106 3219.06.14 12.9 19,3 101 2925.06.14 13.4 13.6 94 2926.06.14 12.8 15.8 106 31

Table-3.10: National Ambient Air quality Standards (NAAQS)S.No.

POLLUTANTS TimeWeightedAverage

Concentration of Ambient AirIndustrial,ResidentialRural andother area

EcologicallySensitive

area(notified by

CentralGovernment)

Method ofMeasurement

1Sulphur Dioxide(SO2) , µg/m3

Annual*

24 hours **

50

80

20

80

-Improved west andGacke-Ultravioletfluorescence

2 NitrogenDioxide (NO2) ,µg/m3

Annual*

24 hours **

40

80

30

80

- Modified Jacab &Hochheister (Na-Arsentire)-Chemiluminescene

3 ParticulateMatter (Sizeless than 10,µm) or PM10 ,µg/m3

Annual*

24 hours **

60

100

60

100

-Gravimetric-TOEM-Beta attenuation

4 ParticulateMatter (Sizeless than 2.5 ,µm) or PM2.5,

Annual*

24 hours **

40

60

40

60

-Gravimetric-TOEM-Beta attenuation


3-18WAPCOS Limited

S.No.

POLLUTANTS TimeWeightedAverage

Concentration of Ambient AirIndustrial,ResidentialRural andother area

EcologicallySensitive

area(notified by

CentralGovernment)

Method ofMeasurement

µg/m3

Note:* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurement in a year at a particular site taken twice a week 24 hourly ata uniform intervals.** 24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in ayear. 2% of the time, they may exceeded the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring.

Observations on Ambient PM10 LevelsThe summary of ambient PM10 concentrations at the four monitoring stations is given in Table-

3.11. The highest average PM10 concentration was observed as 127 g/m3 at the Giral Site. The

average PM10 at four stations ranged from 87.35 to 112.73 g/m3.

Table-3.11: Ambient Air Quality Status- PM10 (Unit : g/m3)Station Maximum Minimum AverageGiral 127 78 112.73Akli 113 87 99.50Thumbli 104 70 87.35Mine Site 121 85 104.12

Observations on Ambient PM2.5 levelsThe summary of ambient PM2.5 concentrations observed at the four monitoring stations is

summarized in Table-3.12. The highest PM2.5 value of 39 g/m3 was observed at station at Mine

site. The average PM2.5 level ranged from 30.15 to 33.23 g/m3. The average PM2.5 values were

lower than the permissible limit of 60 g/m3 specified for Industrial, Residential, Rural and Other

areas.

Table-3.12: Ambient Air Quality Status – PM2.5 (Unit : g/m3)Station Maximum Minimum AverageGiral 38 24 33.23Akli 34 26 30.15Thumbli 21 32 26.67Mine Site 27 39 31.34


3-19WAPCOS Limited

Observations on Ambient SO2 levelThe summary of ambient SO2 level is given in Table-3.13. The maximum SO2 level of 21.5

g/m3 was observed at station mine site. The average SO2 level ranged from 10.03 to 17.20

g/m3. The average SO2 levels were well below the permissible limit of 80 g/m3 specified for

Industrial, Residential, Rural and Other areas.

Table-3.13: Ambient Air Quality Status SO2 level (Unit: g/m3)Station Maximum Minimum AverageGiral 20.5 14.2 17.20Akli 18.5 13.7 15.63Thumbli 12.5 6.9 10.03Mine Site 21.5 12.8 16.18

Observations on Ambient NO2 LevelsThe summary of ambient NO2 level is given in Table-3.14. The average NO2 levels ranged from

12.54 to 19.06 g/m3. The maximum NO2 level observed during the survey was 22.65 g/m3 at

Giral site, which is also well below the permissible limit (80 g/m3) specified for Industrial,

Residential, Rural and Other areas.

Table-3.14: Ambient Air Quality Status NO2 levels (Unit: g/m3)Station Maximum Minimum AverageGiral 22.65 13.80 19.06Akli 18.4 12.9 15.80Thumbli 14.5 10.5 12.54Mine Site 19.5 12.6 16.55

3.12 NOISE ENVIRONMENTNoise, unlike other components of environment, is not an element, compound or substance

which can accumulate to cause harm, but it is a special kind of wave action usually transmitted

by air in the form of pressure waves and received by the sensors in the receptors. Noise is a

sound which is composed of many frequency components of various loudness distributed over

the audible frequency range. In general A-weighted decibel scale has been designed to weight

the various components of noise according to the response of the human ear. In dB(A) scale,

noise with pre-dominant middle frequencies is given a much higher loudness value than the

noise which is pre-dominantly low or high frequency in nature.

Sound waves are refracted by wind and temperature gradients in the atmosphere and are

scattered by turbulence. Since, constant atmospheric conditions cannot be counted upon to

provide protection to a noise sensitive area from a noise source, the excess attenuation due to

these factors is usually assumed to be zero in environmental noise assessment.


3-20WAPCOS Limited

Ambient Noise LevelBaseline noise data has been measured using A-weighted sound pressure level meter. The

survey was carried out in calm surroundings. Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurement in the

outside environment was made using sound pressure level meter. The ambient noise levels in

the study area were measured using a weighted sound pressure level meter in April 2014. The

noise level survey was carried out in the calm surrounding. The equivalent noise stations as

monitored at various locations in the study area are summarized in Table-3.15. The equivalent

noise levels as observed in the study area are well within the permissible limit of specified for

residential and rural areas during day time (55 dB(A)) and night time 45 (dB(A)). The ambient

noise standards are outlined in Table-3.16.

Table-3.15: Equivalent noise standards in the study areaLocation of sampling station Equivalent noise level (dB(A))

Day Time Night TimeA. Core ZoneGiral Mine Site 41 37B. Buffer Zone

DholkiyaThumbliRampuraKotraAgoriyaPabupuraTalon Ka ParAkliJalila

404142404142414240

373638363536363737

Table-3.16: Ambient Noise Standards--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Area Category Limits in dB(A) LeqCode of Area ------------------------------------------

Day time Night time--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A. Industrial Area 75 70B. Commercial Area 65 55C. Residential Area 55 45D. Silence Zone 50 40---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Notes: 1. Day time 6 AM and 9 PM

2. Night time is 9 PM and 6 AM3. Silence zone is defined as areas upto 100 metres around such premises as

hospitals, educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are to bedeclared by competent authority. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers andbursting of crackers shall be banned in these zones.

4. Environment (Protection) Third Amendment Rules, 2000 Gazettee notification,Government of India, date 14.2.2000.


3-21WAPCOS Limited

3.13 LANDUSELanduse describes how a patch of land is used (e.g. for agriculture, settlement, Vegetation,

water body etc.), whereas land cover describes the materials (such as vegetation, rocks or

buildings) that are present on the surface. Accurate land use and land cover identification is the

key to most of the planning processes. The land use patterns of the study area for propose Giral

Lignite mining project has been studied through digital satellite imagery data. Remote sensing

satellite data of Resource Sat- 2 Satellite (LISS-IV, Sensor) Path 091 Row 053, sub scene-C

dated 12.01.2014 was procured from National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA), Hyderabad.

The data was processed through ERDAS imagine software package. Ground truth studies were

conducted in the project area to validate various signatures in the satellite images and correlate

them with different land use domains.

The study area considered for the study has been taken as the area within 10 km from the

periphery of the mine lease area. The classified imagery of the study area are given in Figures-

3.7.

The major landuse category in the study area of Giral Lignite Mine project is barren/Open land,

as it accounts for about 66.95% of the study area followed by agricultural land (23.75%). The

area under scrub is 5.54% of the study area. Mining area accounts for about 3.13% of the study

area. Settlements account for about 0.41% of the study area. The area under water bodies is

only 0.21% of the study area. The details of the landuse pattern of the study area are given in

Table-3.17.


3-22WAPCOS Limited

Figure-3.7: Classified images of the study area

Table-3.17: Landuse pattern of the Study Area based on satellite data

Type Area (ha) Area (%)Water Body 182 0.21Scrub 4718 5.54Barren/Open Land 56984 66.95Mining Area 2665 3.13Agricultural Land 20214 23.75


3-23WAPCOS Limited

Type Area (ha) Area (%)Settlement 348 0.41Total 85111 100

3.14 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTSPopulation and Demographic ProfileAs mentioned the proposed project is located in the District Barmer. The study area or the

Project Influence Area comprises of about 18 villages in Sub-district Sheo. The total population

in the study area or the project influence area is of the order of 2368 persons as per Census of

India 2011. The distribution of population and demographic profile in the study area villages is

outlined in Table 3.18 and Figure 3.8.

Table-3.18: Demographic profile of study area villagesS.No Village Name

Tota

lH

ouse

hold

Tota

lPo

pula

tion

Tota

l Mal

e

Tota

l Fem

ale

Popu

latio

n<6

year

s

Ave

rage

Fam

ily S

ize

Sex

Rat

io

Barmer DistrictSheo Subdistrict

1 Rampura 123 789 422 367 179 6 8702 Sargeelapar 112 822 433 389 159 7 8983 Junejon Ki Basti 191 1223 634 589 181 6 9294 Dholkiya 152 1102 589 513 270 7 8715 Akli 196 1220 649 571 263 6 8806 Khejarali 78 540 294 246 123 7 8377 Thumbali 209 1312 693 619 300 6 8938 Giral 81 477 265 212 97 6 8009 Agoriya 96 640 349 291 110 7 834

10 Neembala 306 1909 1003 906 354 6 90311 Neembasar 102 671 351 320 145 7 91212 Kotra 179 862 458 404 176 5 88213 Taloon Ka Gaon 106 632 360 272 127 6 75614 Raneji Ki Basti 107 577 342 235 112 5 68715 Pabupura 24 106 61 45 27 4 73816 Jalila 148 697 412 285 153 5 69217 Mehron Ki Dhani 81 440 242 198 110 5 81818 Talon Ka Par 77 345 190 155 72 4 816

Total 2368 14364 7747 6617 2958 6 854Source: Primary Census Abstract, 2011


3-24WAPCOS Limited

Figure 3.8: Demographic profile in the study area villagesThe distribution of male and female population in study area villages comprises of about 53.9%

and 46.1% respectively. The population comprising of infants and children below the age of 6

years constitute about 20.6% of the total population in the study area villages. The sex ratio and

average family size in the study area villages is 854 and 6 persons per family respectively.

Caste Profile

The distribution of population in study area villages on the basis of caste is depicted in Table

3.19 and Figure 3.9. As per this table, it is observed that General Caste is dominant in the study

area with 85.1% of the total population followed by Schedule Caste 11.5% and Schedule Tribe

3.4%.

Table 3.19: Caste profile in the study area villages

S.No Village Name TotalPopulation

PopulationScheduleCaste

PopulationScheduleTribe

GeneralCastePopulation


1 Rampura 789 210 249 3302 Sargeelapar 822 0 0 8223 Junejon Ki Basti 1223 28 0 11954 Dholkiya 1102 31 0 10715 Akli 1220 220 181 8196 Khejarali 540 0 13 5277 Thumbali 1312 140 17 11558 Giral 477 168 0 3099 Agoriya 640 0 0 64010 Neembala 1909 389 0 1520

Total Male54%

Total Female46%

Total Male

Total Female


3-25WAPCOS Limited

S.No Village Name TotalPopulation

PopulationScheduleCaste

PopulationScheduleTribe

GeneralCastePopulation

11 Neembasar 671 0 0 67112 Kotra 862 123 10 72913 Taloon Ka Gaon 632 31 0 60114 Raneji Ki Basti 577 2 0 57515 Pabupura 106 3 0 10316 Jalila 697 169 0 52817 Mehron Ki Dhani 440 0 0 44018 Talon Ka Par 345 0 0 345

Total 14364 1654 487 12223Source: Primary Census Abstract, 2011

Figure 3.9: Caste Profile in the Study Area Villages

Literacy Levels

The details of literate and illiterate population amongst the total population of study area villages

are shown in Table 3.20 and Figure 3.10. About 41.8% of the total population in the study area

villages is literate, while about 58.2% are illiterate. Among the literate population, males and

females comprise about 56.0% and 25.3% of the total literate population. Further, among the

illiterate population, males and females comprise about 44.0% and 74.7% of the total illiterate

population.

11% 3%

86%

Population Schedule Caste

Population Schedule Tribe

General Caste Population


3-26WAPCOS Limited

Table 3.20: Distribution of literate and illiterate population in the study area villages

S.No Village Name

Tota

lPo

pula

tion

Popu

latio

nLi

tera

te

Mal

eLi

tera

te

Fem

ale

Lite

rate

Popu

latio

nIll

itera

te

Mal

eIll

itera

te

Fem

ale

Illite

rate


1 Rampura 789 268 182 86 521 240 2812 Sargeelapar 822 313 230 83 509 203 3063 Junejon Ki Basti 1223 503 373 130 720 261 4594 Dholkiya 1102 407 287 120 695 302 3935 Akli 1220 456 329 127 764 320 4446 Khejarali 540 223 151 72 317 143 1747 Thumbli 1312 678 447 231 634 246 3888 Giral 477 187 140 47 290 125 1659 Agoriya 640 290 204 86 350 145 205

10 Neembala 1909 892 620 272 1017 383 63411 Neembasar 671 293 218 75 378 133 24512 Kotra 862 368 275 93 494 183 31113 Taloon Ka Gaon 632 263 202 61 369 158 21114 Raneji Ki Basti 577 239 177 62 338 165 17315 Pabupura 106 47 36 11 59 25 3416 Jalila 697 302 240 62 395 172 22317 Mehron Ki Dhani 440 135 115 20 305 127 17818 Talon Ka Par 345 143 109 34 202 81 121

Total 14364 6007 4335 1672 8357 3412 4945Source: Census of India 2011

Figure 3.10: Literacy profile in the Study Area Villages

42%

58% Population Literate

Population Illiterate


3-27WAPCOS Limited

Occupational profile

The details on occupational profile in the study area villages are given in Table 3.21 and figure

3.11. As per this table it is observed that 44.2% of the total population is engaged in some form

of economically productive activity or vocational activity, and have been designated as Total

Working population. On the other hand, the Non-workers or persons who are dependent on the

population, which is engaged in economically productive work accounts for about 55.8% of the

total population. Among the population that is working about 65.4% has been designated as

Main workers while the remaining 34.6% has been designated as Marginal workers.

Table 3.21: Occupational profile in the study area villages

S.No Village NameTo

tal

Popu

latio

n

Tota

lW

orki

ngPo

pula

tion

Mai

nW

orke

rs

Mar

gina

lW

orke

rs

Non

Wor

kers


1 Rampura 789 364 141 223 4252 Sargeelapar 822 535 187 348 2873 Junejon Ki Basti 1223 740 620 120 4834 Dholkiya 1102 565 519 46 5375 Akli 1220 506 277 229 7146 Khejarali 540 152 148 4 3887 Thumbli 1312 623 309 314 6898 Giral 477 222 214 8 2559 Agoriya 640 313 283 30 327

10 Neembala 1909 822 364 458 108711 Neembasar 671 265 151 114 40612 Kotra 862 248 222 26 61413 Taloon Ka Gaon 632 223 207 16 40914 Raneji Ki Basti 577 165 165 0 41215 Pabupura 106 44 25 19 6216 Jalila 697 179 143 36 51817 Mehron Ki Dhani 440 234 81 153 20618 Talon Ka Par 345 151 100 51 194

Total 14364 6351 4156 2195 8013Source: Census of India 2001


3-28WAPCOS Limited

Figure 3.11: Occupational Profile in the Study Area Villages

29%

15%

56%Main Workers

Marginal Workers

Non Workers


4-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-4

ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS

4.1 GENERALBefore start of any Environmental Impact Assessment study, it is necessary to identify the

baseline levels of relevant environmental parameters which are likely to be affected as a

result of the construction and operation of the proposed project. A similar approach has been

adopted for conducting the EIA study for the proposed Giral lignite Mine Project. The chapter

is based on primary data collection for summer season and review of secondary data. The

baseline setting for Ecological aspects have been covered in this chapter following floral and

faunal accounts of the area.

4.2 TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY-FLORAL ACCOUNTSForest types and vegetation composition in the project areaThe Barmer district, which covers the study areas i.e., Giral Lignite Coal Mine Project is

located in western Rajasthan and is part of the Great Indian Desert (Thar). Barmer district is

part of the Western Arid Plain Zone (1A) in the state's classification of agro-ecological

regions. The district has a geographical area of 2.82 million ha. In 1993-94, about 0.8% of

the area had forest cover, 7.3% constituted pasture land, 19.4% was fallow land and 55.9%

was cultivated crop land. The vegetation cover occupies 16.78% of the geographical area of

the State. Of the total vegetation cover, forest area is contributing 4.71% of the geographical

area. The vegetation in arid and semi arid regions is sparse consisting mainly of stunted,

thorny or prickly shrubs and perennial herbs capable of drought resistance. Trees are few

and scattered. The forests of Rajasthan state can be divided into four broad forest types

(Champion and Seth 1968); Dry Deciduous forest, Thorn forest, Broad leaved hill forest,

Dhauk forest, Teak mixed forest and Riverine forest.

The present study area falls under tropical thorn/ scrub forest 6B/C1. The main characteristic

features of this type of forest are described in the following paragraphs.

Tropical Thorn/Scrub Forests 6B/C1.: These forests are found in arid and semi-arid

regions of western Rajasthan, mainly Jodhpur, Pali, Jalore, Barmer, Nagaur, Churu, Bikaner

etc. These extend from western Indo -Pak border and gradually merge with the dry

deciduous mixed forests of the Aravallihills and the south-eastern plateau. The common

trees and shrubs found on stabilized and unstabilized sand-dunes are: Calligonum

polygonoides, Salvadora oleoides, Aerva javanica, Citrulius colocynthis, Prosopis cineraria,

Acacia senegal, Acacia nilotica, Acacia leucophloea, Acacia tortilis and Zizyphus

mauritiana, etc. Capparis deciduas is the indicator species of thorn forests in western part of

the state. The common grasses and sedges which play a vital role in soil conservation are:


4-2WAPCOS Limited

Aristida adscensionis, Cenchrus biflorus, C ciliaris, Desmostachya bipinnata, Eragrastis spp,

Stipagrostis hirtigluma and Cyperus spp., etc. There is a less admixture of dry

deciduous forest species as compared to its counter part of southern tropical thorn

forests of Peninsular India (Champion and Seth, 1968). Prosopis juliflora often grows along

road sides, canals and degraded thorn forest lands and rapidly spreading in sand-dunes.

Prosopis cineraria is a typical desert thorn forest plant with extremely open crops of

scattered trees.

Scrub Forests: It is a vegetation cover predominantly occupied by shrubs or poor tree

growth chiefly of small or stunted trees with crown density less than 10%. It is the dominant

scrub type of State. Thorn scrub is generally seen in the fringes of thorn forests, hill tops and

nearby settlements. Dry Deciduous scrub has been subjected to more degradation and

frequently found in and around dry deciduous forests. Calotropis scrub is specifically found

in long fallow areas and bordering crop fields in desert region. Prosopis juliflora and

Lantana camara are worst invasive alien species and threat to native biodiversity (Reddy,

(2008). Lantana camara prefers openings and fringes of dry deciduous forests and sub

humid tracts of broad leaved hill forests.

4.3 FIELD STUDYThe present report on the ecological aspect of the project area is based on field survey

conducted during summer season. Field surveys were undertaken to get acquainted with

the general patterns of vegetation types and faunal accounts of the study area. Stratified

random sampling in the various vegetation types, further helps in classifying them up to

community level.

4.3.1 ObjectivesThe ecological study of the surrounding area up to 10 km radius of proposed project has

been conducted in order to understand the ecological status of the existing flora and fauna

to generate baseline information and evaluate the probable impacts on the biological

environment.

The objectives of the terrestrial ecological survey are given as below:

Prepare comprehensive checklist of flora in the study area

Determine frequency abundance and density of different vegetation component.

Assess importance value index of the dominant vegetation in the study area of

proposed project.

Estimate of ecological diversity of different plant communities.

Identify and listing of Rare Endangered species –RET.

Identify and listing of plants of biologically, economical and medicinal

importance.


4-3WAPCOS Limited

4.3.2 Sampling sitesA detailed ecological assessment of the project sites at seven locations i.e. three sites in

core zone –mine lease area and four sites in buffer zone – vicinity of existing mine lease

area was undertaken to understand the existing flora and fauna.

The sampling sites for terrestrial ecological survey were given in Table -4.1.

Table-1: Description of Study Sites for terrestrial ecology (Floral and Faunalaccounts) w.r.t. Project Appurtenances

Zones S. No. Sampling locations

Core zoneI Near Jalilo village & Adjoining areaII Thumbli village & Adjoining areaIII Giral village & proposed mine lease area

Buffer zoneIV Aakali village area & vicinity (South west)V Kotra village & Adjoining area (North west)VI Khejarli village & Adjoining area (South East)VI Nimbala village & Adjoining area (East direction)

4.3.3 Methodology Applied for the StudyFor assessing the floral diversity in the study area both floristic survey and quantitative

analysis of vegetation were undertaken. Information regarding local names and locality of

the plants were recorded with the help of the local people and forest staff. The quantitative

analysis of vegetation was done by using quadrats as sampling units. The quadrats were

laid randomly in identified sites of the project area. The vegetation analysis was undertaken

by collecting numerical community data for trees, shrubs and herbs from the randomly laid

quadrats. The size of vegetation patches, 20 each random quadrates of 10mX10m size were

laid to study for tree, 5x5 m for shrubs, while 25 random quadrats of 1 x 1 m size was laid for

enumerated of herbs. The community level studies of the selected sites were conducted

during summer season for trees, shrubs and herbaceous vegetation. During the survey,

individuals within the quadrat were identified up to the species level, and the numbers of

individuals of each species in each quadrat were counted. The GBH of all trees having girth

of more than 16 cm (equivalent to 5 cm DBH) was measured. Vegetation composition was

evaluated by analyzing the frequency, density, abundance and importance value index (IVI)

according to Mishra, (1968) and Curtis and McIntosh. Based on the quadrat data, frequency,

density and cover (basal area) for each species were calculated using the following formula:

Density (ha-1) = (Total number of individuals of the species in all the quadrats/total number of

quadrats studied) multiplied by the factor depending on the quadrat size to express on per

hectare basis for trees and shrubs, individual/m2 for herbs.


4-4WAPCOS Limited

Frequency (%) = (Number of quadrats in which the species occurred/total number of

quadrats studied) × 100;

Basal cover is considered as the portion of ground surface occupied by a species (Greig-

Smith, 1983). Basal area = πr2 = C2/4 π Where, C = 2 πr (C = Circumference at breast

height; r = Radius)

Frequency indicates the number of sampling units in which a given species occur and thus

express the dispersion of various species. The density represents the numerical strength of

the species in the community. Based on the quantitative characters like frequency, density,

and dominance (Basal area or cover) the overall dominance of a species on the entire

community is measured by analyzing the synthetic character called Importance Value Index

(IVI), Philips (1959) reported that IVI expresses the abundance and ecological success of

any species. The values of IVI were computed by the summation of the value of relative

frequency, relative density and relative dominance (Curtis and McIntosh 1950 and 1951;

Mishra, 1968). Relative values for frequency, density and basal area were calculated by

dividing the individual species value by the total value multiplied by 100.

Diversity indices, EvennessThe herbaceous vegetation has been studied through tiller analysis. Separate shoots

appearing above the ground were counted as individual tiller. The method was selected for

study because it was difficult to decide where an individual plant begins and where it ends.

Grasses and sedges usually form smaller and large tufts and the number of aerial shoots

(culms) varies greatly with the tufts as well as the species. Such a method provides a real

picture of the actual composition of herb age of mixed grassy vegetation. To assess diversity

of floral elements and structure of the plant community in different study sites, various

diversity indices were analyzed.

Shannon Weinner index (H)

It is calculated by using the following formula:

H = –

s

iii pp

1ln

where, s = the number of species

pi = the proportion of individuals or abundance of the ith species

expressed as a proportion of total cover

ln = log base n.

Concentration of dominance (Cd) It is calculated as Cd= ∑ ((ni/n)2) where ni is number of

individuals of taxon i. The value of D Ranges from 0 (all taxa are equally present) to 1 (one

taxon dominates the community completely).


4-5WAPCOS Limited

Equitability or evenness was calculated by following formula which reads:

It is calculated using the formula given by Pielou (1966, 1969),: ∕ , where H is the

Shannon’s index and S represents the number of species. It indicates the relative

abundance or proportion of individuals among the species..

Identification of Rare, Endangered and Threatened plant speciesRare and endangered species were identified referring to the Red Data Book of India,

following the IUCN Red list of plants and other available literature, flora and herbarium

pertaining to the rare/endangered species of state of Rajasthan.

Medicinal & Economic important PlantsAn Ethno botanical survey is carried out to identify the wild plants used by the local peoples

for different purposes.

4.3.4 Finding of Floral SurveyDuring the floristic survey of present study, a total of 64 plant species under 53 genera and

30 families have been recorded from the proposed project area. The results of the present

study shows that out of 64 flowering plants, herbs contributed maximum 18 species

(28.13%) followed by shrub and grasses each with 15 species (23.44%), trees with 14

species (21.87%) and climber & sedge with single species (1.56%). The results of the

present study are placed in the Table-4.2 and depicted in Figure-4.1.

Table-4.2: Vegetation status of the study site in summer seasonPlant habit No. of species Contribution of species (%)

Herbs 18 28.13Trees 14 21.87

Shrubs 15 23.44Grasses 15 23.44Climbers 1 1.56Sedges 1 1.56Total 64 100%

Figure-4.1: Floristic composition of different life forms in the study area

024681012141618

Trees Shrubs Herbs Grasses Climbers Sedges

Num

ber o

f spe

cies

Life forms


4-6WAPCOS Limited

The list of floral species observed at various sampling locations of project area in summer

season is given in Table-4.3.

Table-4.3: List of plants recorded from the proposed project area in summer seasonPlant species Family Local name HabitAcacia jacqemontii Benth. Mimosaceae Bhubavalio ShrubAcacia leucophloea (Roxb.) Willd., Mimosaceae - TreeAcacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, Mimosaceae - TreeAcacia senegal (L.) Willd Mimosaceae Kumatio TreeAcacia tortilis (Forssk.) Hyene Mimosaceae - TreeAerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

Amaranthaceae Buyi Shrub

Aerva pseudotomentosaBhatt & Halb Amaranthaceae - ShrubAlbizia lebbeck (L.) Benth. Mimosaceae Saras TreeAristida adscensionis L Poaceae - GrassArundo donax L. Poaceae - GrassAzadirachta indica A. Juss. Meliaceae Neem TreeBoerhavia diffusa L. Nyctaginaceae - HerbBrachiaria ramose Poaceae - GrassCalligonum polygonoides L. Polygonaceae Phog ShrubCalotropis gigaantia(L.) R. Br. Madar ShrubCalotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. Asclepiadaceae Oak ShrubCapparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew Capparaceae Kairir TreeCenchrus biflorus Roxb., Poaceae - GrassChrysopogon fulvus (Spreng.) Chiov. Poaceae - GrassCitrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad Cucurbitaceae Tumba ClimberClerodendrum phlomidis L. F. Verbenaceae Arni ShrubCorchorus depressus L. Stocks Tiliaceae Chamghas HerbCrotalaria burhia Buch.-Ham. ex Benth. Fabaceae Sinia ShrubCrotalaria medicaginea Lam. Fabaceae - HerbCynodon dactylon (L.) Pers Poaceae - GrassCyperus rotundus L. Cyperaceae - SedgeDactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. Poaceae - GrassDalbergia sissoo Roxb. Fabaceae Shesam TreeDesmostachya bipinnata (L.) Stapf, Poaceae - GrassErgrostis minor Host. Poaceae - GrassEucalyptus sp. Myrtaceae - TreeEuphorbia granulate Forssk Euphorbiaceae - HerbFarsetia hamiltonii Royle. Brassicaceae Hiranchsba ShrubHeliotropium subulatum Hochst ex DC. Boraginaceae - HerbIndigofera cordifolia Heney ex Roth. Fabaceae - HerbIndigofera linifolia (L. f.) Retz. Fabaceae Torki HerbIndigofera linnaei Ali. Bot. Fabaceae - HerbLannea coromandelica (Houtt) Merr. Anacardiaceae Jhingan TreeLasiurus hirsutusBoiss. Diang Poaceae - GrassLeptadenia pyrotechnica (Forsk.) Decne Asclepiadiaceae kheep HerbMelhania denhamii R. Br. Sterculiaceae - HerbMollugo Cerviana (L.) Seringe. Molluginaceae Chirio HerbNeurada procumbens L. Rosaceae Chapari HerbPanicum turgidum Poaceae - GrassPanicum turgidum Forssk Poaceae - GrassPeganum harmala Linn. Zygophylaceae Gandhiyo. ShrubPortulaca oleracea Linn. Portulacaceae Luni Herb


4-7WAPCOS Limited

Plant species Family Local name HabitProsopis cineraria (L.) Druce Mimosaceae Khejri Tree

Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. Mimosaceae Kikar ShrubSalvadora oleoides Decne Salvadoraceae Jhal TreeSida rhombifolia L. Malvaceae - HerbSolanum surattense Burm. f. Solanaceae Kantakari HerbStipagrostis hirtigluma Poaceae - GrassSuaeda fruiticosa Forsk Amaranthacea - ShrubTamarix aphylla (L.) karst. Deut. Tamaricaseae Farash ShrubTecomella undulata Bignoniaceae Roheda TreeTephrosia falsiformis (L.) Pers, Fabaceae Rati biyani ShrubTephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. Fabaceae - HerbTragus roxburghii Poaceae - GrassTribulus terrestris L. Zygophylaceae Kanti HerbTypha angustata Bor & Chaubard Typhaceae - HerbUrochloa panicoides Poaceae - GrassZiziphus nummularia (Burm. F.) Wight &Arn.

Rhamnaceae Jhar bor Shrub

Zizyphus mauritiana Lam. Rhamnaceae Bor Tree

4.3.5 Economically and medicinally important plant speciesThe forests are endowed with many useful plant species viz., timber yielding species,

medicinal plants, fuel wood, fruits, dyes, fodder and various minor forest products etc. The

people of the area use wild plants in their daily life as food, medicine, fiber, fodder, fuel

wood, timber, fruits and other minor forest products. They use medicinal plant species for

sustenance of their traditional healthcare system both logistically as well as economically.

These plants are used internally for treating diarrhea, dysentery, cough, cold, fever, asthma

and externally for rheumatism, skin diseases, cuts, boils, fractures and injuries. The usage of

various plant species by the locals varies with the availability of resources in the surrounding

areas. The list of economically and medicinally important plant species observed in the area

is enumerated in Table-4.4.

Table-4 4: List of economically & medicinally important plant species recorded in theproject area

Plant species Family Local name Economic & Medicinalvalues

Aerva pseudotomentosa Bhatt &Halb

Amaranthacea - Medicinal

Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss.Ex Schult.

Amaranthacea Buyi Making roof shed

Leptadenia pyrotechnica (Forsk.)Decne

Asclepiadiaceae kheep Medicinal

Farsetia hamiltonii Royle. Brassicaceae Hiranchsba MedicinalIndigofera linnaei Ali. Bot. Fabaceae - MedicinalTephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. Fabaceae - MedicinalAcacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, Mimosaceae - Fuel woodProsopis cineraria (L.) Druce Mimosaceae Khejri Fodder/vegetable/Timber

Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. Mimosaceae Kikar Fencing/ Soil binder


4-8WAPCOS Limited

Plant species Family Local name Economic & Medicinalvalues

Eucalyptus sp. Myrtaceae - OrnamentalBoerhavia diffusa L. Nyctaginaceae - MedicinalAristida adscensionis L Poaceae - Fodder grassPanicum turgidum Forssk Poaceae - Roof making/ ThatchingZizyphus mauritiana Lam. Rhamnaceae Bor Fruit edibleSalvadora oleoides Decne Salvadoraceae Jhal Fodder/fuel woodSolanum surattense Burm. f. Solanaceae Kantakari MedicinalClerodendrum phlomidis L. F. Verbenaceae Arni MedicinalTribulus terrestris L. Zygophylaceae Kanti MedicinalPortulaca oleracea Linn. Portulacaceae Luni MedicinalCalotropis gigaantia(L.) R. Br. Madar MedicinalAzadirachta indica A. Juss. Meliaceae Neem Medicinal/fuelwoodCalotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. Asclepiadaceae Oak MedicinalCalligonum polygonoides L. Polygonaceae Phog MedicinalTecomella undulata Bignoniaceae Roheda Timber/MedicinalAlbizia lebbeck (L.) Benth. Mimosaceae Saras TimberDalbergia sissoo Roxb. Fabaceae Shesam TimberCrotalaria burhia Buch.-Ham. exBenth.

Fabaceae Sinia Medicinal

Citrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad Cucurbitaceae Tumba Fruit edible

4.3.6 Community characteristics at various sampling sites in summer seasonSite-I, Near Jalilo village & Adjoining areaA total of 5 tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) were recorded at the site-I. The

average density of this group of species was recorded to be 95 individuals/ ha. A perusal of

the data on the ecological analysis revealed that the highest value of IVI (106.25) was

recorded for Prosopis cineraria which was the dominant tree species at this site. Azadirachta

indica and Acacia Senegal were the co-dominant tree species. Frequency value ranged from

15% to 25%.

In shrub community layer, a total of 6 shrub species were recorded from this sampling site.

The average density of this group of species was recorded to be 810 individuals /ha. In

terms of IVI (106) as well as density (325 individuals/ha) Prosopis juliflora was recorded to

be the dominant shrub species at the site. Calotropis procera and Aerra javassica were the

co-dominant species of the site while rest of species showed intermediate range of IVI and

density. Frequency value ranged from 15% to 60%.

A total of 12 herbaceous species were recorded from this site during summer season. The

average density of this group of species was recorded to be 26.80 individuals /m2.

Importance value of Index which shows the dominance of the species was recorded highest

for Conyza japonica (53.91) followed by Cynodon dactylon (IVI, 39.23) and Cenchrus

biflorus (IVI, 35.09). Frequency value ranged from 10% (Solanum surattense) to 52%

(Dactyloctenium scindicum). The details are given in Table-4.5.


4-9WAPCOS Limited

Table-4.5: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-IPlant species Frequency

%Density Abundance IVI

(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce. 25 30 1.20 106.25

Azadirachta indica A. Juss. 20 20 1.00 61.89Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 20 20 1.00 61.59Salvadora oleoides Decne 15 15 1.00 41.94Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew 10 10 1.00 28.33(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 60 325 5.42 122.69Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 55 140 2.55 59.72Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

20 165 8.25 37.72

Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew(Sapling)

35 60 1.71 31.81

Acacia jacquemontii Benth. 30 55 1.83 26.59Calotropis gigaantia(L.) R. Br. 15 65 4.33 21.47(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Dactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. 52 6.24 12.00 53.91Aristida adscensionis L 36 4.96 13.78 47.62

48 4.00 8.33 39.23Cenchrus biflorus Roxb. 44 3.40 7.73 35.09Cenchrus biflorus Roxb., 32 3.00 9.38 32.92Desmostachya bipinnata (L.) Stapf, 32 2.72 8.50 30.61Tribulus terrestris L. 40 0.72 1.80 15.49Corchorus depressus L. Stocks 28 0.60 2.14 12.48Indigofera linifolia (L. f.) Retz. 28 0.40 1.43 10.70Boerhavia diffusa L. 24 0.44 1.83 10.42Citrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad 20 0.24 1.20 7.73Solanum surattense Burm. f. 8 0.08 1.00 3.79

Site-II, Thumbli village & Adjoining areaA total of four tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) were recorded from the site-II. The


the data on the ecological analysis revealed that the highest value of IVI (151.52) as well as

density (50 individuals/ha) was recorded for Prosopis cineraria which was dominant species

of the site followed by Acacia senegal (IVI, 73.27). This sampling site represents the

occurrence of poor tree species it is because of the climatic condition of the area is not much

favourable to growth and survival of tree species.



terms of IVI (78.61) as well as density (300 individuals/ha) Prosopis juliflora was recorded to

be the dominant species of the area. Capparis decidua, Calotropis procera, and Aerva

javanica were the co-dominant species of the site. The remaining species showed

intermediate range of IVI and density.


4-10WAPCOS Limited

A total of 13 herbaceous species were recorded at this site during the field study in summer

season. The average density of this group of species was recorded to be 21.36 individuals

/m2. In terms of IVI, Aristida adscensionis was the dominant herbaceous species in the site

having IVI of 43.21 followed by Ergrostis minor (IVI, 39.28) and Panicum turgidum (IVI,

31.01). The details are given in Table-4.6.

Table-4.6: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at site-IIPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce 50 50 1.00 151.82

Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 20 25 1.25 73.27Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 15 20 1.33 41.39Acacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, 10 15 1.50 33.52(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

65 150 2.31 39.02

Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 80 190 2.38 63.64Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew(Sapling)

70 225 3.21 78.22

Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 90 300 3.33 78.61Aerva pseudotomentosaBhatt & Halb 35 75 2.14 21.12Tephrosia falsiformis (L.) Pers, 30 55 1.83 14.79Tamarix aphylla (L.) karst. Deut. 10 20 2.00 4.61(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Lasiurus hirsutusBoiss. Diang 36 0.88 2.44 16.07Arundo donax L. 44 1.36 3.09 21.19Stipagrostis hirtigluma 36 1.40 3.89 21.45Panicum turgidum 60 2.40 4.00 31.01Urochloa panicoides 52 2.24 4.31 29.34Heliotropium subulatum Hochst ex DC. 40 1.84 4.60 25.73Ergrostis minor Host. 68 3.40 5.00 39.28Cenchrus biflorus Roxb. 32 2.24 7.00 30.94Aristida adscensionis L 48 3.80 7.92 43.21Crotalaria medicaginea Lam. 36 0.60 1.67 13.18Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. 24 0.56 2.33 12.02Boerhavia diffusa L. 28 0.52 1.86 11.64Sida rhombifolia L. 12 0.12 1.00 4.92

Site-III, Giral village & proposed mine lease areaA total of 6 tree species were recorded from the site-III (Giral village & proposed mine lease

area) during the field survey in summer season. The average density of this group of species

was recorded to be 135 individuals/ha. On the basis of IVI (71.59) and density (35

individual/ha), Acacia senegal was found as the dominant tree species at this site. The

associated species in the tree canopy were Prosopis cineraria (IVI, 61.91) and Salvadora

oleoides (IVI,51.75).

During the study for shrub community layer, a total of 8 shrub species were recorded from

this sampling site. The average density of this group of species was recorded to be 955


4-11WAPCOS Limited

individuals/ha. The understorey represents rich diversity as compared to the other site. The

highest value of IVI (89.05) as well as density (295 individuals/ha) was recorded for Prosopis

juliflora which was the dominant shrub species at this site. The dominance of Prosopis

juliflora may be due to its non palatable nature and drought tolerant species. The other

competing species in the shrub strata were Calotropis procera, Capparis decidua, Aerva

javanica and Acacia jacqemontii.

A total of 10 herbaceous species were recorded with an average density of 16.44 individuals

/m2 at this site. In terms of density (4.80 individuals/m2) and IVI (66.13) Panicum turgidum

was the dominant herb species followed by Cynodon dactylon (IVI, 56.91) and Lasiurus

hirsutus (IVI, 47.17). The details are given in Table-4.7.

Table 4.7: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-IIIPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 30 35 1.17 71.59Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce 25 25 1.00 61.91Salvadora oleoides Decne 10 20 2.00 51.75Acacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, 20 25 1.25 48.38Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew 15 15 1.00 34.72Acacia tortilis (Forssk.) Hyene 15 15 1.00 31.64(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

20 180 9.00 39.77


35 70 2.00 25.84

Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 55 235 4.27 80.78Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 60 295 4.92 89.05Acacia jacqemontii Benth. 10 80 8.00 19.51Aerva pseudotomentosaBhatt & Halb 30 40 1.33 18.65Farsetia hamiltonii Royle. 20 20 1.00 14.50Tamarix aphylla (L.) karst. Deut. 15 35 2.33 11.90(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Panicum turgidum 52 4.80 9.23 66.13Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers 60 4.00 6.67 56.91Lasiurus hirsutusBoiss. Diang 40 2.96 7.40 47.17Tragus roxburghii 40 1.44 3.60 28.35Leptadenia pyrotechnica (Forsk.) Decne 44 0.80 1.82 21.03Portulaca oleracea Linn. 12 0.64 5.33 20.49Corchorus depressus L. Stocks 48 0.60 1.25 19.43Boerhavia diffusa L. 40 0.48 1.20 16.47Indigofera linifolia (L. f.) Retz. 24 0.48 2.00 14.27Tribulus terrestris L. 20 0.24 1.20 9.75

Site-IV, Aakli village area & vicinityOn the site-IV (near Kotda village, buffer zone), the tree layer community is represented by

occurrence of 5 tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) during field study. The average

density of this group of species was recorded to be 145 individuals /ha. A perusal of the data


4-12WAPCOS Limited

on the ecological analysis revealed that the highest value of IVI (123.95) as well as density

(55 individuals/ha) was recorded for Azadirachta indica which was the dominant species of

the site followed by Salvadora oleoides (IVI, 68.99) and Acacia senegal (IVI, 47.90).

A total of 6 shrub species were recorded from this sampling site. The average density of this

group of species was recorded to be 1005 individuals /ha. The highest value of IVI (92.94) as

well as density (355 individuals/ha) was recorded for Prosopis juliflora which was the

dominant species of the site. The other co-dominant species in the shrub strata were

Calotropis procera, Acacia jacqemontii and Ziziphus nummularia.

A total of 12 herbaceous species were recorded with a density of 30.44 individuals /m2 at the

site-IV. In terms of density (5.84 individuals/m2) and IVI (46.73), Dactyloctenium scindicum

was the dominant herbs of the site closely followed by Aristida adscensionis (IVI, 45.34),

Cynodon dactylo (IVI, 41.99) and Ergrostis minor (IVI, 37.11). Frequency value ranged from

8% (Citrullus colocynthis) to 60% (Dactyloctenium scindicum). The details are given in

Table-4.8.

Table-4.8: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-IVPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Azadirachta indica A. Juss. 40 55 1.38 123.95Salvadora oleoides Decne 20 35 1.75 68.99Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 15 25 1.67 47.90Zizyphus mauritiana Lam. 15 20 1.33 34.18Albizia lebbeck (L.) Benth. 10 10 1.00 24.98(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 20 280 14.00 68.00Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 35 355 10.14 92.84Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew(Sapling)

55 175 3.18 54.83

Acacia jacqemontii Benth. 60 120 2.00 51.67Ziziphus nummularia (Burm. F.) Wight &Arn.

30 60 2.00 22.94

Peganum harmala Linn. 15 15 1.00 9.71(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Heliotropium subulatum Hochst ex DC. 32 2.96 9.25 30.26Ergrostis minor Host. 40 4.08 10.20 37.11Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers 52 5.00 9.62 41.99Dactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. 60 5.84 9.73 46.73Aristida adscensionis L 44 5.40 12.27 45.34Chrysopogon fulvus (Spreng.) Chiov. 44 2.80 6.36 28.28Brachiaria ramose 52 2.52 4.85 26.97Portulaca oleracea Linn. 28 0.40 1.43 9.68Citrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad 8 0.08 1.00 3.51Euphorbia granulate Forssk 12 0.16 1.33 5.15Tribulus terrestris L. 32 0.56 1.75 11.57Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. 40 0.64 1.60 13.42


4-13WAPCOS Limited

Site-V, Kotra village & Adjoining areaA total of 6 tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) were recorded from the site-V. The


the data on the ecological analysis revealed that the highest value of IVI (78.36) as well as

density (40 individuals/ha) was recorded for Prosopis cineraria which was the dominant

species at this site followed Salvadora oleoides (IVI, 60.85) and Azadirachta indica

(IVI,59.29).



terms of IVI (80.21) as well as density (275 individuals/ha) Prosopis juliflora was recorded to

be the dominant species of the area. Capparis decidua, Calotropis procera and Aerva

javanica were the co-dominant species at this site.

A total of 13 herbaceous species were recorded from this site during summer season. The

average density of this group of species was recorded to be 30.80 individuals /m2. In terms

of IVI, Panicum turgidum was found as the dominant herbaceous species at this site having

IVI of 43.64 followed by Ergrostis minor (IVI, 40.04) and Chrysopogon fulvus (IVI, 37.82).

Frequency which indicates distribution of species over the area was also recorded highest

for Brachiaria ramose (60%). The details are given in Table-4.9.

Table-4.9: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-VPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Salvadora oleoides Decne 20 25 1.25 60.85Azadirachta indica A. Juss. 20 30 1.50 59.29Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 25 35 1.40 54.96Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce 40 40 1.00 78.36

Zizyphus mauritiana Lam. 15 15 1.00 28.99Acacia tortilis (Forssk.) Hyene 10 10 1.00 17.55(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Ziziphus nummularia (Burm. F.) Wight &Arn.

60 40 0.67 33.80


55 230 4.18 71.47

Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

30 160 5.33 40.04

Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 35 275 7.86 80.21Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 20 160 8.00 43.28Calotropis gigaantia(L.) R. Br. 20 30 1.50 13.53Crotalaria burhia Buch.-Ham. ex Benth. 10 35 3.50 9.82Tamarix aphylla (L.) karst. Deut. 15 10 0.67 7.86(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Heliotropium subulatum Hochst ex DC. 44 3.80 8.64 33.05Chrysopogon fulvus (Spreng.) Chiov. 32 4.12 12.88 37.82Lasiurus hirsutusBoiss. Diang 48 4.44 9.25 36.79


4-14WAPCOS Limited

Plant species Frequency%

Density Abundance IVI

Dactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. 52 4.56 8.77 37.27Ergrostis minor Host. 48 4.96 10.33 40.04Panicum turgidum 40 5.28 13.20 43.64Brachiaria ramose 60 0.40 0.67 13.55Indigofera linifolia (L. f.) Retz. 24 0.16 0.67 5.98Citrullus colocynthis (L.) Schrad 36 0.20 0.56 8.21Euphorbia granulate Forssk 36 0.24 0.67 8.50Boerhavia diffusa L. 44 0.36 0.82 10.62Corchorus depressus L. Stocks 28 0.72 2.57 11.27Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers. 40 0.84 2.10 13.26

Site-VI, Khejarli village & Adjoining areaA total of 4 tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) were recorded from the site-VI (near

Khejarli village, buffer zone area). The average density of this group of species was recorded

to be 138 individuals/ ha. A perusal of the data on the ecological analysis revealed that the

maximum value of IVI (101.62) and density (48 individuals/ha) with 50% frequency was

recorded for Prosopis cineraria which was the dominant tree species at this site closely

followed by Salvadora oleoides (IVI, 100.60) and Azadirachta indica (IVI, 56.50).



terms of IVI (91.67) as well as density (315individuals/ha) Calotropis procera was recorded

to be the dominant shrub species of the area. Prosopis juliflora and Capparis decidua were

the co-dominant species of the site. Frequency value ranged from 15% to 80%.

A total of 16 herbaceous species were recorded from this site during the vegetation study in

summer season. The average density of this group of species was recorded to be 30.42

individuals /m2. Importance value of Index which shows the dominance of the species was

recorded highest for Dactyloctenium scindicum (42.48) followed by Cenchrus biflorus (IVI,

41.88) and Aristida adscensionis (IVI, 39.60). The details are given in Table-4.10.

Table-4.10: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-VIPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Azadirachta indica A. Juss. 20 25 1.25 56.50Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce 50 48 1.20 101.62

Salvadora oleoides Decne 30 40 1.33 100.60Acacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, 15 25 1.67 41.27(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 75 315 4.20 91.67Capparis decidua (Forssk.) Edgew(Sapling)

65 270 4.15 62.77

Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 70 190 2.71 63.83Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. Ex 80 200 2.50 51.49


4-15WAPCOS Limited

Plant species Frequency%

Density Abundance IVI

Schult.Ziziphus nummularia (Burm. F.) Wight &Arn.

45 75 1.67 23.59

Farsetia hamiltonii Royle. 15 15 1.00 6.66(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers 56 2.60 4.64 25.35Ergrostis minor Host. 64 4.80 7.50 38.33Cenchrus biflorus Roxb., 68 5.44 8.00 41.88Aristida adscensionis L 60 5.00 8.33 39.60Dactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. 52 5.36 10.31 42.48Cenchrus biflorus Roxb. 44 2.52 5.73 24.73Lasiurus hirsutusBoiss. Diang 36 2.28 6.33 23.52Tribulus terrestris L. 44 0.60 1.36 11.67Tragus roxburghii 28 0.56 2.00 9.78Euphorbia granulate Forssk 28 0.48 1.71 9.07Solanum surattense Burm. f. 12 0.12 1.00 4.03Boerhavia diffusa L. 20 0.20 1.00 5.67Leptadenia pyrotechnica (Forsk.) Decne 12 0.20 1.67 5.33Indigofera linnaei Ali. Bot. 20 0.24 1.20 6.11Melhania denhamii R. Br. 16 0.24 1.50 5.89Sida rhombifolia L. 20 0.28 1.40 6.55

Site-VII, Nimbala village & Adjoining areaA total of 6 tree species (≥ 5 cm dbh or ≥16 cm GBH) were recorded during field study in

summer season. The average density of this group of species was recorded to be 170

individuals /ha. A perusal of the data on the ecological analysis revealed that the highest

value of IVI (81.55) as well as density (50 individuals/ha) was recorded for Acacia nilotica

which was the dominant species at this site followed by Acacia senegal (IVI, 70.49) and

Prosopis cineraria (IVI, 60.24).

A total of 7 shrub species were recorded from this sampling site. The average density of this

group of species was recorded to be 820 individuals /ha. The highest value of IVI (77.40) as

well as density (225 individuals/ha) was recorded for Prosopis juliflora which was the

dominant species of the site. The other associated species in the shrub strata were Aerva

javanica, Calotropis procera and Calotropis procera.

A total of 15 herbaceous species were recorded with a density of 30.48 individuals /m2 at the

site-VII. In terms of density (6.16 individuals/m2) and IVI (47.46), Aristida adscensionis were

the dominant herbs at this site followed by Dactyloctenium scindicum (IVI, 40.60), Ergrostis

minor (IVI, 40.42) and Panicum turgidum (IVI, 29.13). Frequency value ranged from 8%

(Solanum surattense) to 85% (Cenchrus biflorus). The details are given in Table-4.11.


4-16WAPCOS Limited

Table-4.11: Distribution analysis of tree, shrub and herb community at Site-VIIPlant species Frequency


(A) TREE COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Acacia senegal (L.) Willd 25 40 1.60 70.49Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce 30 35 1.17 60.24

Acacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del, 40 50 1.25 81.55Acacia leucophloea (Roxb.) Willd., 10 15 1.50 33.80Acacia tortilis (Forssk.) Hyene 15 20 1.33 30.80Tecomella undulata 10 10 1.00 23.12(B) SHRUB COMMUNITY (Density ind/ha)Calotropis procera (Aiton) R. Br. 20 160 8.00 54.29Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC. 35 225 6.43 77.40Aerva javanica (Burm. f.) Juss. ExSchult.

60 175 2.92 58.68


55 120 2.18 51.30

Farsetia hamiltonii Royle. 30 55 1.83 24.47Tamarix aphylla (L.) karst. Deut. 15 60 4.00 18.42Acacia jacquemontii Benth. 20 25 1.25 15.46(C) HERB COMMUNITY, (Density ind/m2)Stipagrostis hirtigluma 24 2.08 8.67 22.43Ergrostis minor Host. 36 4.92 13.67 40.42Aristida adscensionis L 40 6.16 15.40 47.46Panicum turgidum 44 3.40 7.73 29.13Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers 48 2.32 4.83 22.54Dactyloctenium scindicum Boiss. 52 5.40 10.38 40.60Cenchrus biflorus Roxb., 52 2.60 5.00 24.40Tragus roxburghii 40 0.80 2.00 12.42Tribulus terrestris L. 44 0.56 1.27 11.41Euphorbia granulate Forssk 44 0.48 1.09 10.91Corchorus depressus L. Stocks 36 0.52 1.44 10.06Solanum surattense Burm. f. 8 0.12 1.50 3.79Indigofera linifolia (L. f.) Retz. 20 0.24 1.20 5.95Leptadenia pyrotechnica (Forsk.) Decne 32 0.40 1.25 8.70Indigofera linnaei Ali. Bot. 36 0.48 1.33 9.79

4.3.7 Diversity indices measurementsDiversity indices calculated for all the sampling sites separately for trees, shrubs and herbs

for summer season are presented in Table-4.12 to 4.14. Shannon Weinner index (H) is an

index used to measure diversity in categorical data. Value of Shannon Weinner index (H)

more than 2 is indicative higher species diversity while its value around 1 or less than 1

indicates low diversity. Diversity index (H') increases in value as the number of species

increases. Thus, higher the value of (H) the greater is the species diversity in the

community. In the present study, species diversity (H') ranged from 1.28 to 1.74 for tree

strata which indicates low tree diversity in the area. Similarly in shrub strata, diversity (H')

ranged from 1.51 to 1.77 in all the study sites and shows low diversity. In case of herbs, the

range of diversity was calculated 1.89 to 2.33 for all the sampling sites. The maximum index


4-17WAPCOS Limited

for any community clearly indicates that the species richness plays an important role in

increasing species diversity.

Dominance diversity (Cd) is another diversity index which always ranges from 0 - 1,

indicates species dominance within community gives greater weight to common species. In

addition, the value of Dominance closer to 1 indicates areas dominated by single or few

species. The value of Dominance had followed an opposite trend of diversity. From the

present observations, Site-II (tree layer) found to have maximum concentration dominance

(0.30) with least diversity (1.28) whereas, site-II (herb layer) had the lowest dominance

(0.07) with maximum species diversity (2.33). Dominance is also used for the estimation of

heterogeneity of various sites.

The distribution of individuals among the species, referred to as evenness. Evenness

compares the similarity of the population size of each of the species present. As species

richness and evenness increase, so diversity increases. In the present study Pielou’s

evenness (J) ranged between 0.91 to 0.97 for tree species and 0.83-.0.91 for shrub species

and 0.82 to 0.91 for herbaceous layer in all study sites which reflected low value of evenness

& indicates that there is dominance by few species.

Table-4.12: Diversity indices of tree species occurring in various sampling sites

Sampling sitesShannon-wiener

Diversity Index (H)Concentration of

dominance(Cd)

Evenness(J)

I 1.55 0.22 0.96II 1.28 0.30 0.92III 1.74 0.18 0.97IV 1.47 0.25 0.91V 1.70 0.19 0.94VI 1.34 0.27 0.97VII 1.66 0.21 0.92

Table-4.13: Diversity indices of shrub species occurring in various sampling sites

Sampling sitesShannon-wiener

Diversity Index (H)Concentration of

dominance(Cd)

Evenness(J)

I 1.57 0.23 0.88II 1.72 0.20 0.88III 1.76 0.21 0.84IV 1.51 0.24 0.84V 1.72 0.20 0.83VI 1.58 0.22 0.88VII 1.77 0.19 0.91


4-18WAPCOS Limited

Table-4.14: Diversity indices of herb species occurring in various sampling sites

Sampling sitesShannon-wienerDiversity Index

(H)

Concentration ofdominance

(Cd)Evenness

(J)I 2.05 0.15 0.82II 2.33 0.07 0.91III 1.89 0.19 0.82IV 2.10 0.14 0.84V 2.10 0.14 0.82VI 2.22 0.13 0.80VII 2.24 0.13 0.83

4.3.8 RET status of plantsDuring the present survey of proposed project area, following IUCN Red list of threatened

plants, no rare and endangered species falls under endangered category but only single tree

species Tecomella undulata (Roheda) has been reported as endangered species (Bhau et

al., 2007). This tree species was recorded from the buffer zone of the proposed project area.

4.4 FAUNAThe fauna of the study area consists mostly of species with zoo-geographic affinities of

Sahraian affiliation and indigenous variably Saharo-Tharian basin. However, to gain an insight

in the following respects for species of carnivore, ungulates, non-human primates, mammals,

birds, reptiles and other fauna, the survey was conducted in the buffer zone area up to 10km

radius from the periphery of Mine Lease Area and core zone (mine lease area 2656 ha) area

comes under the existing project. Ground surveys was carried out in different phases by

trekking the impact zone for identification of faunal species inhabiting the area in core zone-

mine lease area and buffer zone including village land, adjoining forest on the slopes of hillocks

and sand dunes, taals and agricultural fields. Apart from direct sightings and primary data

generated through transects and trails, we have also collected secondary data from literatures

published, forest department and other sources like citing of animals by the locals in the study

area. Therefore, listing of the animals encountered in the different village institutional areas of

the study sites was attempted after confirmed identification (Parter, 1965; Menon, 2003). The

local people knowledge about the Thar Desert is productive in so far as their topography,

physiography and biota are concerned. Keeping this in view, it is important to record the animal

taxa available in buffer zone as well as core zone areas needs to be studied and recording of

their presence. The methodology adopted during these field surveys to cover different faunal

species or group of animals mentioned, are described below:

Direct sighting and observation: Records of direct sightings have been maintained with

thrust on activity pattern, habitat usage, feeding and breeding behaviour, interspecific

relationship, etc. when encountered.


4-19WAPCOS Limited

Collection of indirect evidences: Animal droppings or other body parts (like quills, bones,

feathers, etc.) were collected for further identification and analyses (like scat analysis to

reveal the food composition of carnivore species). Density of droppings recorded for

relative abundance and status of different species. Observations and records of calls,

burrows, dens, shelter, etc. attempted. Transects were repeated, as most of the species

found in the study area are nocturnal.

Direct sightings on series of transects for biodiversity profile and for birds in particular

were recorded by point count method in the major vegetation zones as well as in

different micro habitats like, water body, agro-ecosystems, orans, etc. Chance

encounters were recorded after confirming identification based on Woodcock (1980); Ali

and Ripley (1987); Grewal, et.al. (1995) and Kazmierczak, (2000).

Faunal species were identified through visual observations made and with the help of

photographs taken by Fuzifilm FinePix SL1000 Camera with 100x zoom.

Direct sightings on series of transect were laid in the study area for intensive field survey of

biodiversity. Besides this, birds were recorded by point count method in the major vegetation

types as well as in different micro habitats like, water body, agro-ecosystems, orans, etc.

Apart from this, chance encounters were also recorded during the study period. After

confirmed identification (Woodcock1980, Ali and Ripley 1983, Grewal et al., 1995,

Kazmierczak 2000) species were recorded. Birds were sighted and identified through visual

observation and photographs done by Fuzifilm FinePix SL1000 Digital Camera with 50X

optical zoom and 50X digital zoom.

The biota of the study area has both mesic and desert elements owing to location of the

Thar in the Saharo-Tharian Basin. The biota is represented by mammal, birds and reptiles

mainly. Most of the biota from herpetofauna and mammalian fauna represent the Sahraian

affiliation. The details of different faunal communities encountered during study period are

described in the following sections.

4.4.1 MammalsMost of the faunal species among mammals are general in nature and domesticated. The

mammals reported from the area are belongs to wild animal and domesticated categories.

Wild AnimalsAmong the wild animals, the common langur, Nielgai, Chinkara, and jungle boar are found

all over the region. There are also reports available of jungle cat (Felis chaus), and the

desert cat is nocturnal frequenting the area. The small Indian mangoose Herpestes sp,

hares and fox are also common in the region. The wild pig (Sus scrofa) is dirty feeder and

seen frequently. The hare (Lepus nigricollis) is common in open area and scrub vegetation.

Species like Chinkara, mongoose and hares were predominantly found in the crop area


4-20WAPCOS Limited

where as jackal, fox, jungle cats, etc. were predominantly observed in the community lands

and around water bodies, where as blue bull, desert cat and many small rodents were

confined to all kinds of ecological settings. All these species are commonly observed both in

core zone area including reclamation zone-plantation site and buffer zone area. The list of

mammal species reported in the Study Area is given in Table-4.15 (Refer Plate-1)

Table-4.15 : List of Mammal species reported in the Study AreaOrder/Family Species Name Common Name WPA 1972 /

IUCN StatusOrder: PrimatesColobidae Presbytia entellus Common Langur Schedule II/LCOrder: ArtiodactylaSuidae Sus scrofa cristatus Wild Bore Schedule III/ LCOrder: CarnivoraFelidae Felis silvestris Desert Cat -Felidae Felis chaus Jungli Cat Schedule II/ LCCanidae Canis auresus Gidar /Golden jackal Schedule II/cCanidae Vulpus bengalensis Indian fox Schedule III/VCCanidae Vulpus vulpus Desert fox Schedule III/VCHerpestidae Herpestes edwardsii Common Mongoose Schedule IV/

LCHerpestidae Herpestes auropunctatus Small Indian

MangooseSchedule IV/LC

Order: RodentiaSciuridae Funambulus pinnantii Five Striped Squirrel Schedule IV/

LCMuridae Rattus rattus-refescena Indian house rat Schedule V/ LCMuridae Mus musculus House mouse Schedule V/ LCMuridae Meriones hurrianae Desert Gerbil Schedule V/LCMuridae Tatera indica Indian Gerbil Schedule V/LCMuridae Gerbillus gleadowi Hairy-footed Gerbil Schedule V/LCOrder:ErinaceomorphaErinaceidae Hemiechinus auritus Long eared

HedgehogSchedule V/LC

Order: LagomorphaLeporidae Lepus nigricollis dayanus Desert Hare Schedule IV/

LCOrder :ChriopteraEmballonuridae Taphozus melanpogon Sheath tailed bat C / LCVespertilionidae Scotophilus heathii Yellow House bat VC / LCOrdeer: ArtiodactylaBovidae Boselaphus

tragocamelusNielgai Schedule III/LC

Bovidae Gazella gazelle benetti Chinkara Schedule I / VC*Note: –Viewed from the Secondary data only. VC-Very common, C-Common; IUCN statusLC – Least Concern

Amongst the large mammals the most common observed mammal is Chinkara (Gazalla

gazalla bennetti), which is also the “state animal” of Rajasthan. Similarly a wide range of

ecosystems and different microhabitats support a variety of aquatic and terrestrial birds.


4-21WAPCOS Limited

Equal representation of different agro-ecosystem and community lands allow variety of

grainvore, insectivore, carnivore, omnivore, nactivore and the scavengers. Large and small

community water bodies in and around study area allow many migratory birds and resident

birds to breed in the area.

Domestic animals and LivestockCattle rearing or animal husbandry is one of the main occupations of the people in Thar,

which results in high livestock population. The density of livestock population is from 42 to

226 in the Thar (Chouhan, 1988). Livestock includes sheep, goat, camel, cow and donkey.

Population of buffalo is very low and is found only in the irrigated belt of the region. Livestock

population is very high in the region and is still increasing. The density of livestock varies

from 42 per km2 in Jaisalmer to as high as 226 in Sikar district (Chouhan, 1988) indicating a

positive correlation with the rainfall from west to east.

Most of the faunal species among mammals are general in nature and domesticated. The

domestic animals cows and buffaloes, sheep, goats, horses, monkeys, donkeys, dogs and

fowls are prominent. Cows are found all over the region. Cows are reared for milk and

draught purposes, while bullocks are used in ploughing and transport. She-buffaloes are

reared for milk, while he-buffaloes are used for ploughing and draught. Donkeys and horses

are used for transporting clothes and building materials. Dogs are kept by owners to guard

their premises. Goats are reared for mutton and some goats yield milk. Sheep are reared

mainly for wool and mutton. Fowls are reared for eggs and chicken. The list of domesticated

mammalian fauna found in the Study Area is given in Table-4.16.

Table-4.16: List of domesticated mammalian Fauna found in the Study AreaS. No. Local Name Zoological Name Family1 Cow Bos indicus Bovidae2 Buffalo Bubalus indicus Bovidae3 Dog Cains familieris Canidae4 Goat Capra hircus Bovidae5 Horse Equus cabilus Equidae6 Ass Equus hermionus Equidae7 Cat Felis domesticus Canidae8 Sheep Ovius polic Bovidae

4.4.2 ReptilesThe agriculture fields in the study area provide an ideal habitat for many snakes and reptiles.

Reptiles such as cobra, rat snake and common krait were found occasionally in the open

scrubs and other vegetation areas as per-narrated by local people. Moniter Lizard was

observed along the roadside during the survey. Among reptiles, Garden lizard and rock

Agama are prominent. Lizards are insectivorous and snakes are carnivorous and feed on

rats, mice, frogs, toads, lizards, worms, insects and eggs. Among snakes, cobra is protected


4-22WAPCOS Limited

under schedule II of Indian wild life protection act (1972). None of the reptile species is

present in the IUCN Red List of threatened animals (2013). The list of common reptiles

found in the study area is given in Table -4.17 and shown in Plate 1.

Table-4.17: List of Reptiles reported in the study areaS.No.

Scientific Name Common Name Family WPA1972

1 Hemidactylus domesticus House lizard /Chipkali Gekkonidae Sch-V2 Hemidactylus persicus Persian Gecko Gekkonidae Sch-V3 Tropiocolotes persicus euphorbiacola Dwarf Gecko Gekkonidae Sch-V4 Uromastyx hardwickii Indian Spiny Tailed

LizardGekkonidae Sch-V

5 Sittana ponticeriana* Fan throated lizard* Agamidae Sch-V6 Ophiops jordoni Jordan’s snake-eye Lacertiidae Sch-V7 Calotes versicolor Common Garden Lizard Agamidae Sch-V8 Agama minor Small Tailed Agama Agamidae Sch-V9 Bufoniceps laungwalansis Toad headed agama Agamidae Sch-V10 Varanus bengalensis Moniter Lizard Varanidae Sch- II11 Varanus griseus Desert monitor Varanidae Sch-V12 Mabuya carinata Common skink Scincidae Sch-V13 Ophiomorus raithmai Sauria (lizards) Scincidae Sch-V14 Ptyas mucosu Rat Snake Colubridae Sch-IV15 Lytorhynchus paradoxus Sindh awl-headed

SnakeColubridae Sch-V

16 Naja nasal Indian cobra / Nag Elapidae Sch-II17 Vipera russelli* Russels viper /Asriya* Viperidae Sch-V18 Echis carnatus sochureki Saw scale viper Sch-V19 Eryx conicus Common sand boa Boidae Sch-V*Secondary data based

All the species are of Wildlife Schedule II, IV and V. Indian cobra (Nazi nasal), Russell’s

viper (Viper Russell) and Indian Monitor Lizard (Various bengalensis) come under Wildlife

Schedule II, whereas northern house-Gecko (Hamidatylis spp.) and monitor lizard (Varanus

griseus) cover under Wildlife Schedule V. The other species are in the schedule IV of the

Indian Wildlife. All these species are common in occurrence.

Five Striped Squirrel Funambulus pinnantii Common Langur Presbytia entellus


4-23WAPCOS Limited

Chinkara Gazella gazelle benetti Chinkara Gazella gazelle benetti

Desert monitor- Varanus sp Indian Hare Lepus : Faecal pallets and pugmark

Plate 1 : Images of wildlife animals encountered in the study area

4.4.3 Avi-faunaThe presence of water birds or marshy or swamp habitat loving wetland bird speices from

families like Anatidae, Podicipedidae, Ciconiidae, Phalacrocoracidae, Ardeidae,

Threskiornithidae, Raliidae, Recurvirostridae, Charadriidae and Rostratulidae are viewed

from the surrounding areas of Dhawa-Doli combined villages area, Pachpadra wet land,

Dhorimanna and Luni Basin of Barmer district. Though most of the species from these

families are absent in the project core zone and buffer zone areas except fewever species

from family Ardiedae and migratory birds from family Gruidae. The presence of wetland bird

species is due to formation of rainfed ponds - scattered water bodies like ponds, check dams

etc. in the low lying areas –taals in the district which are not seen in the core zone located in

this arid lands with undulating plains and dry climate except some wet period during

monsoon season. The runoff from project area and hillocks of Kotra village is collected in

Sayar Talab-the watershed area of Kotra village. The site has predominant migratory birds

Grus sp along with other birds and raptor species. Most of the species of birds which are

observed are local and endemic in nature preferring grassland, open scrubs and exposed

rocky landscape and undulating sand dunes interacting and inhabiting with open scrub

vegetation of Prosopis spp, Acacia spp and Calotropis spp etc.. Apart from these, birds of


4-24WAPCOS Limited

plain area or nearby agriculture fields are present and observed. Therefore, birds species

from families like Columbidae, Muscicapidae, Corvidae, , Cuculidae, Meropidae, Alandidae,

Passeridae, Pycnonotidae, Leiothrichidae, Cistocolidae, Nectariniidae, Phasianidae, are

quite frequently reported in the area which are general in nature and belongs to least

concern category as per IUCN status. The predominant families are Muscicapidae,

Cistocicolidae, Nectariniidae, and Phasianidae.

Most of the birds species found here are from arid and hot climatic conditions and landforms

of undulating to plain topography with open scrub habitat on hillocks and sand dunes

including slopes/ low land plains with agriculture fields. Dominant bird species observed

during the survey are House Sparrow, house crow, magpie robin, spotted dove, Brahmini

myna, Common Myna and Blue Rock Pigeon, common myna, Red wattled lapwing, little

egret and grey wagtail. Acacia and Prosopis trees are popular roosting sites for birds like

Crows, Mynas, Herons and Egrets. Other birds found in project area are Par grey and

painted Partridges, Kites, Parrot, Starling, Swallow Doves, Peacock, Owl, Eagle, and some

Humming birds. Thus, primary data as well secondary data shows the following birds

species of general in nature as depicted in Table-4.18 and Plates 2 to 5 are present.

The frequent baya weaver bird, Ploceus philippinus frequent plains, while the white-backed

munia Lonchura striata the forest areas. The common sparrow, Passer domesticus a

resident, is common everywhere in nearby villages. The blue rock pigeon, Columba livia

hovers round plains and hilly regions. The spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis belongs to all

forests and the painted Sandgrouse, Pterocles fasciatus is confined to scrub forest. The

common sandgrouse Pterocles exustus a resident, is seen in plains, mostly in open grass

lands. The peocock Pavo cristatus, is very common in scrub forest is common in the areas.

The common grey partridge, Francolinus pictus a resident, is very common in scrub forests.

Table-4.18 Details of Avifaunal species reported in the Study AreaS.No. Family/Scientific Name Common Name Residential

StatusThreatStatus

IWA1972

Accipitridae1 Milvus migrans-govinda Pariah Kite/Black Kite R C IV2 Accipiter badius (Gmelin) Shikra R C IV3 Elanus caeruleus Black winged kite R C4 Neophron percnopterus* Egyptian vulture* R C IV5 Butastur teesa White eyed buzzard R C6 Buteo buteo* Common buzzard* M C7 Aquila rapax Tawny eagle R C8 Aquila nipalensis Steppe Eagle M C9 Gyps indicus* long-billed vulture * R - -

Falconidae10 Falco tinnunculus Kestrel R VC IV11 Falco jugger Laggar falcon R C IV

ANATIIDAE11 Anas acuta* Northern Pintail* WM C IV


4-25WAPCOS Limited

S.No. Family/Scientific Name Common Name Residential

StatusThreatStatus

IWA1972

12 Nettapuscoromandelianus*

Cotton teal* M C

Anhingidae13 Anhinga melanogaster* The Oriental / Indian

Darter*14 Anhinga rufa* Darter* M C IV

Gruidae15 Grus antigone The sarus crane R C16 Grus grus Common crane M C17 Grus virgo Demoiselle Crane kurjaa M C18 Grus leucogeranus* Siberian Crane* M C

Podicipedidae19 Tachybaptus ruficoliis* Little Grebe* R C

Ardeidae20 Egretta garzetta

(Linnaeus)*Little Egrets* R C IV

21 Casmerodius albus/ Ardeaalba*

Large/Great Egret* M C IV

22 Bubulcus ibis (Linnaeus) Cattle Egret R VC IV23 Ardea cinerea Linnaeus* Grey Heron* LM C IV24 Ardeola grayii Indian Pond Heron R C IV

Phalacrocoracidae25 Microcarbo niger* Little Cormorant* M VC IV26 Phalacrocorax fuscicollis* Indian Cormorant* M VC IV27 Phalacrocorax carbo* Large Cormorant* M VC IV

RALLIDAE28 Fulica atra* Common Coot* M C IV

Threskiornithidae29 Threskiornis

melanocephalusOriental Black-headed Ibis R NR IV

30 Pseudibis papillosa Red napped Ibis / BlackIbis

R NR

Columbidae31 Columba livia Gmelin Blue Rock Pigeon R C IV32 Streptopelia senegalensis Little Brown Dove R VC IV33 Streptopelia decaocto Eurasian Coller dove R VC IV34 Streptopelia tranquebarica Red-collared dove R C IV

Corvidae35 Corvus splendens Vieillot House Crow R VC IV36 Dendrocitta vagabunda

(Latham)Indian Treepie /Rufoustreepie

R C

Hirundinidae37 Hirundo smithii* Wire-tailed Swallow* R c38 Riparia paludicola* The brown-throated

martin*M

39 Riparia riparia* The sand martin* M C LC40 Ptyonoprogne concolor* Dusky Craig Martin* R C

Cuculidae41 Eudynamys scolopacea

(Linnaeus)Asian Koel R C IV


4-26WAPCOS Limited


StatusThreatStatus

IWA1972

42 Centropus sinensis Greater coucal or crowpheasant

R C IV

43 Clamator jacobinus* Pied crested cuckoo * M VC IVStrigidae

44 Athene brama (Temminck) Spotted Owlet R VC45 Bubo bubo (Linnaeus) Eurasian Eagle-Owl R C

Caprimulgidae46 Caprimulgus asiaticus

LathamCommon Indian Nightjar R C

47 Caprimulgus affinis Savannah Nightjar RApodidae

48 Apus affinis House little Swift RM49 Apus apus* The common swift* M

Alcedinidae50 Alcedo atthis (Linnaeus)* Common Blue Kingfisher* M VC IV51 Halcyon smyrnensis

(Linnaeus)*White breastedKingfisher*

M VC IV

Meropidae52 Merops orientalis Latham Green Bee-eater R VC IV53 Merops philippinus* Blue-tailed Bee-eater* WM C IV

Family : Upupidae54 Upupa epops Linnaeus Common Hoopoe R C IV

Family : Picidae(Woodpecker)

55 Dendrocopos mahrattensis Yellow crownedwoodpecker

R -

Family : Alaudidae Lark56 Eremopterix grisea

(Scopoli)Ashy-crowned Sparrowlark

R C -

57 Ammomanes phoenicura Rufous tailed /desert lark R/SM VC IV58 Galerida cristata Crested Lark R C IV59 Mirafra erythroptera Indian Bushlark R VC IV60 Calandrella brachydactyla Greaterr Short toed lark M61 Eremopterix nigriceps Black-crowned sparrow-

larkR C IV

Family: Passeridae62 Passer domesticus

(Linnaeus)Indian House Sparrow R VC IV

63 Ploceus Philippinus(Linnaeus)

Baya Weaver R C

64 Petronia xanthocollis Chestnut-shoulderedpetronia

R -

Family : Motacillidae65 Anthus rufulus Vieillot Oriental Pipit R C66 Motacilla cinerea* Gray Wagtail* M C IV67 Motacilla

maderaspatensis*Large pied wagtail M C IV

68 Motocilla flava* Western Yellow Wagtail M C IVTephrodornithidae

69 Tephrodornispondicerianus

Common Woodshrike R C


4-27WAPCOS Limited


StatusThreatStatus

IWA1972

Family : Pycnonotidae70 Pycnonotus cafer

(Linnaeus)Red-vented Bulbul R VC IV

71 Pycnonotus leucotis White-eared Bulbul R C VLeiothrichidae

72 Turdoides striatus(Dumont)

Jungle Babbler R C IV

73 Turdoides caudatus Common Babbler R C IV74 Turdoides malcolimi Large grey babbler R C IV

Cisticolidae75 Orthotomus sutorius

(Pennant )Common Tailorbird R VC

76 Prinia buchanani Rufous fronted prinia R C77 Sylvia nana The Asian desert warbler R C IV

Ciconiidae78 Ciconia ciconia* White Stork WM C /LC79 Ciconia nigra* Black Stork WM C

Family : Laniidae80 Lanius schach* Rufous back shrike R -81 Lanius excubitor Grey shrike R VC IV82 Lanius meridionalis Southern Grey shrike R C IV

Family : Nectariniidae83 Nectarinia asiatica

(Latham)Purple Sunbird R/M VC IV

Family: Phasianidae84 Coturnix coturnix

(Linnaeus)Common Quail* WM C

85 Coturnix coromandelica Rain Quail* SM -86 Francolinus pondicerianus Grey Francolin R C IV87 Pavo cristatus Linnaeus Indian Pea Fowl R VC I

Pteroclididae88 Pterocles exustus The chestnut-bellied

sandgrouseR -

Podicipedidae89 Tachybaptus ruficollis* The Little Grebe* R C

Burhinidae90 Burhinus oedicnemus Eurasian thick-knee R -

Charadriidae91 Vanellus indicus

(Boddaert)Red-wattled Lapwing R VC IV

Scolopacidae92 Actitis hypoleucos* Common Sandpiper M /R C IV93 Tringa ochropus* Green Sandpiper M /R c94 Himantopus himantopus* Blackwinged stilt R C IV

Psittaculidae95 Psittacula krameri

(Scopoli)Rose-ringed Parakeet R VC IV

Sturnidae96 Acridotheres tristis

(Linnaeus)Common Myna R VC IV

97 Sturnus pagodarum Brahminy Starling R C IV


4-28WAPCOS Limited


StatusThreatStatus

IWA1972

Muscicapidae98 Monticola solitaries* Blue Rock-Thrush M -99 Saxicola caprata Pied Bushchat R/M C IV100 Saxicola torquatus Common stonechat M101 Copsychus saularis Oriental magpie robin R C IV102 Saxicoloides fulicata Indian Robin R VC IV103 Oenanthe deserti The desert wheatear R -104 Oenanthe oenanthe* The northern wheatear M nc

Dicruridae105 Dicrurus macrocercus

/adsimilisBlack Drongo R VC IV

Coraciidae106 Coracias benghalensis Indian roller R C IV

Glareolidae107 Cursorius coromandelicus Indian courser R C IV

Parridae108 Parus nuchalis* White-naped tit* R C IV109 Parus major Grey tit R C IV

Source: As Surveyed R-Resident, M-Migratory, Wm Winter migratory Sm –summermigration, C –Common, VC-Very common, NC-not common, LC-Lease concern*Note-*Reported from secondary data, not sighted during field survey

Migratory AvifaunaAs per the primary survey conducted and secondary information collected, total 109 species

are reported in the project influenced area. Out of these 109 species 37 speices are reported

from the secondary data and reported by various workers in the area. Out of these species,

migratory bird species from the family Gruiidae are observed in the Sayar Taal near village

Kotra or Mine lease area Giral. This is due to formation of this wetland during heavy floods in

the Thar desert happened in 2006-7, which resulted submergence of larger area in the

vicinity inundating Kawas village. This Taal also receives runoff water during rains from

surrounding area near Kotra village and down slope from Giral Lignite Mine towards Sayar

Taal (Plate 6). This area attracts number of wetland species including migratory demoiselle

crane Grus virgo. However, no impact has been visualised from the project activity as the

area is located in the buffer zone.

Migratory Birds IUCN Red Data StatusThere are many species of desert ecosystem, savannah grass, open scrubs, wetland

species or open agriculture field species are observed in the area which are least concern as

per IUCN status as per IUCN Red Data Book. Thus, among the international migratory birds,

no endangered species were observed as per IUCN Red data book.


4-29WAPCOS Limited

Crested Lark - Galerida cristata Red-vented bulbul-Pycnonotus cafer

Common bushchat Black-crowned sparrow-Eremopterix sp

Indian House Sparrow - Passer domesticus Southern Grey Shrike Lanius meridionalis

Plate- 2: Images of wildlife animals encountered in the study area


4-30WAPCOS Limited

National Bird Indian Pea fowl – Pavo cristatus

Common Babler - Turdoides caudatus Grey Shrike Lanius sp

Indian Bushlark - Mirafra erythroptera The white-eyed buzzard (Butastur teesa)

Plate-3: Images of wildlife animals encountered in the study area


4-31WAPCOS Limited

The demoiselle crane - Grus virgo

The demoiselle crane - Grus virgo Indian Roller - Coracias benghalensis

Gray Francolin- Francolinus pondicerianusPlate-4: Images of wildlife animals encountered in the study area


4-32WAPCOS Limited

Grey Shrike Lanius excubitor Collared dove Streptopelia spp

Green Bee Eater White-eared Bulbul Pycnonotus leucotis

Plate- 5: Images of wildlife animals encountered in the study area


4-33WAPCOS Limited

Plate-6 : Image Sayar Taal in buffer zone area near village Kotra, Raneji ki basti

4.5 AUTHENTICATED LIST OF FLORA AND FAUNA

The list of flora and fauna authenticated by DFO is enclosed as Annexure- II & IIIrespectively.


WAPCOS Limited 5-1

CHAPTER-5PREDICTION OF IMPACTS

5.1 GENERALThe mineral extraction whether by open cast or underground method entails varied type of

adverse impacts on the surrounding environment. The magnitude and significance,

however, varies in case of different minerals depending upon the method of mining, scale

of mining sensitivity area, in conjunction with the topography of the area, quantum and type

of overburden generated etc. In general, mining activities are accompanied by a variety of

environmental impacts which can lead to the degradation of the environment as a whole.

Open cast mining involves excavation and movement of large volume of top soil and

overburden which lead to myriad effects on the environment. The Chapter deals with the

positive as well as negative impacts anticipated as a result of operation of the proposed

lignite mine at Giral.

The impacts have been classified in various aspects of environment listed as below:

- Air environment- Noise- Water environment- Land environment- Ecology- Socio-economic environment.

5.2 IMPACTS ON AIR ENVIRONMENTThe mining operations contribute towards air pollution by emission of dust particles. The

intensity of impacts is directly related to the rate of production from mining. Majority of the

mining equipment would run on diesel. The mining activity is likely to increase the level of

Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx). The increased vehicular

movement is likely to increase the emission of hydrocarbons. The sources of pollutants are

given in Table-5.1.

Table-5.1: Sources of pollutantsSource Type PollutantsStacks of overburden & lignite, loading & unloadingactivities

Area SPM

Operation of mining equipment Point SPM, SO2

Vehicular movement Line SPM, NOx and CO

(i) Area sourcesThere will be emissions of dust due to fugitive sources. The bulk of fugitive emissions are

dust particles generated by mechanical disturbances of granular substances exposed to the

air. The various sources of fugitive dust emissions in the Giral lignite mine are:

- loading and unloading


WAPCOS Limited 5-2

- wind erosion of pile surfaces and ground areas around the pile

- emission from paved and unpaved roads.

Loading and unloadingThe receival and disposal of dusty materials releases the dust which is mechanically

agitated by the movement of the excavating equipment and the turbulent air eddies created

during the process. The amount of dust generated depends on particle size, wind velocity

and the material moisture content.

Wind erosion from pile surfacesDust emissions may be generated by wind erosion of open cast piles and exposed areas

within a disposal facility. These sources are typically characterized by non-homogenous

surfaces impregnated with non-erodible elements. The aggregate material surfaces are

characterized by finite availability of the erodible material. Any natural crusting of the surface

binds the erodible material which reduces the erosion potential. The emissions are greatest

during periods of material movement, high wind and dry periods.

Erosion from paved and unpaved roadsUnlike the sources described earlier, the emissions from roads are not due to an identifiable

unit operation at each facility, but roads serve as linkages between the various unit

operations. Particulate emissions occur whenever a vehicle travels over a paved or unpaved

surface. For considering the worst scenario all the approach roads have been taken as

unpaved.

Estimation of fugitive emissionsa) Fugitive emission due to loading and unloading of lignite

(U/5)1.3

E = k(0.0013) ----------------(M/2)1.4

Where :

E = emission factor kg/ton of material loadedk = particle size multiplier (dimensionless)U = mean wind speed, meters per second (miles per hour)M = material moisture content (%)Values assumed for calculationk = 0.74U = 5.66 mphM = 45%

Using the above equation and values, the estimated emission rate is 0.00036 kg/ton of

material loaded.


WAPCOS Limited 5-3

b) Loading and unloading of overburdenThe emission rates during loading have been estimated as per the following equation:

ELS = 1.946 x 10-4 SUM2

where,ELS = load in emission rate (kg/ton of material loaded)S = silt content (%)U = wind speed (kmph)M = moisture content (%)

Values assumed for calculationS = 10%U = 8.5M = 10% (assumed)

Using the above equation and values, the estimated emission rate is 0.0001659 kg/ton of

material loaded.

c) Erosion from unpaved roadsParticulate emissions occur whenever a vehicle travels over an unpaved surface. The

fugitive emissions are much higher in unpaved road. The fugitive emission from unpaved

roads is calculated as per the following equation:

E = k (S/12)a (W/3)b

where

E - kg of fugitive emission/vehicle miles travelledS - silt content (%)W - Weight of the vehicle (kmph)

Values assumed for calculationS = 10%W = 15 tonnes including 5 tonnes of truck weight and 10 tonnes of

lignite weight)M = 10% (assumed)a = 0.7b = 0.45k = 4.9Using the above equation and values, the estimated emission rate is 7.638 kg/VMT or 4.75

kg/vehicle kilometer traveled.

EMISSION DETAILSThe emission details from various sources are estimated in Table-5.2

Table-5.2: Emission details from various sourcesLoading of the Lignite

Ore tonnes/year 1000000Total Working Days 300Operational Hours 8Total operational hours 2400


WAPCOS Limited 5-4

Activity rate t/hr 416.6666667Uncontrolled emission

Emission factor kg/t 0.00036Activity Rate t/hr 416.6666667Operational Hours hrs 2400Emission kg/hr 0.15Area of influence sq.m 300000Area Source Emission rate (A) gm/sec/sq.m 0.00000014

Loading of the WasteTotal Working Days 300Operational Hours 8Total operational hours 2400Activity rate (stripping ratio 1:20, and specificgravity as 2.0, total OB handled 10 milliontones/year) tpd 33,333.333

Uncontrolled emissionEmission Rate kg/t 0.0001659Activity Rate t/hr 4166.6667Operational Hours hrs 2400Emission kg/hr 0.74Area Source Emission rate (B) gm/sec/sq.m 0.000000640

Haulage Emissions- transport of WasteQuantity Waste @ 1.2 times overburden , takingswelling factor as 20% = 1.2 *10 =12 million tonesper annum Tpd

40,000

Operational hours 2400Capacity of each tipper 15

Total number of tippers per year21

800,000lead length per trip,km 5Total VKT per year 40,000,000Emission kg/VKT 4.75Total emission kg/year 19,000,000Uncontrolled emission rate, gm/sec/sq-m C 0.02932

Haulage Emissions- transport of ligniteQuantity Ore tpa 1000000Operational hours 2400Capacity of each tipper 15Total number of tippers per year 66666.66667lead length per trip,km 5Total VKT per year 333,333.333Emission kg/VKT 4.75Total emission kg/year 1583333.333Uncontrolled emission rate, gm/sec/sq m- D 0.00244

Total emissions :A - 0.00000014 gm/sec/sq. m.B - 0.000000640 gm/sec/sq. m.C - 0.0293 gm/sec/sq mD - 0.00244/sec/sq m

Total emissions : 0.0317gm/sec/sq.m


WAPCOS Limited 5-5

The ambient air quality modeling has been done using SCREEN model for stability class F.

The increase in SPM level for uncontrolled emissions is given in Table-5.3.

Table-5.3: Increase in SPM level for uncontrolled emissionsDistance Increase in SPM level (g/m3)50 60.50100 34.02200 18.93300 13.50400 10.57500 8.700600 7.400700 6.438800 5.770900 5.2291000 4.781

(ii) Point sourcesIn the proposed Giral lignite mine, the major point source of pollution is due combustion of

fuel in operation of various mining equipment, which will lead to generation of SO2 and NOx.

The emission factors for SO2 and NOx. The emission factors for SO2 and NOx in the active

mine area are estimated based on the emission factors given in AP-42 (Compilation of Air

Pollutant Emission Factors, Fifth Edition, 1995), USEPA. The average fuel consumption of

various mining equipment is given in Table-5.4.

Table-5.4: Fuel consumption in various mining equipmentEquipment Fuel consumption (lph) No. Total Fuel Consumption (lph)Showel 50 4 200Dumper 25 4 100Dozer 25 4 100Drillers 25 4 100Back hoe excavators 25 4 100Grader 20 3 60Tipper 40 3 120Loader 40 3 120Pumpset 30 2 60Total 960

The emission rate for various pollutants due to combustion of diesel in various mining

equipment is given in Table-5.5.

Table-5.5: Emission rates for various pollutants due to fuel combustionPollutant Emission factor

(gm/hr) (gm/sec)SO2 3646.4 1.013NOx 8257.4 2.294


WAPCOS Limited 5-6

Mathematical ModellingThe impact of emission of air pollutants has been predicted using Gaussian Plume

Dispersion model. The model is a mathematical solution of three-dimensional advection-

diffusion equation. The model has the following assumptions:

Diffusion in downwind direction is insignificant compared with mean flow (advectiondominates over diffusion).

Wind speed is not a function of position. Diffusivities are not functions of position

The model requires the following inputs:

- Quantities of raw materials (including fuels).- Fuel analysis (e.g. sulphur content).- For exit gases: Velocity Temperature Flow rate Density Specific heat Heat emission rate Emission rate of pollutant- For Stack

internal diameter of exhaust height from ground level- Wind Speed- Ambient Temperature- Cloud cover- Humidity

The basic equation used in the ambient air quality modelling is given as below:

C(x) = Q

------------------- { exp (-1/2 (H/z)2 )}

2 yz

Where

C = concentration at a distance x from an effective source of height HQ = Uniform emission rate of pollutanty z = standard deviation of plume concentration in horizontal & vertical

directionsu = mean wind speedH = effective height of release, i.e. physical stack height & plus plume rise.

The stability classes as classified through Pasquill Stability Classes was utilized to assess

the stability class. For the modelling purpose stability class C was used. Based on the

findings of Gausian Plume Dispersion model, the short-term increase in ground level

concentration are given in Table-5.6.


WAPCOS Limited 5-7

Table-5.6: Short-term increase in Ground Level Concentration (Unit : g/m3)Pollutant Baseline level Incremental increase Resultant ConcentrationSO2 16.18 0.64 16.82NOx 16.55 1.27 17.82

Thus, it is clear from Table-5.6, that increase in levels of various pollutants is not expected to

be significant as a result of the proposed mining activities. Thus, no significant impact on

ambient air quality is anticipated.

5.3 IMPACTS ON NOISE LEVELS AND GROUND VIBRATIONSThe mining activities lead to generation of noise from various sources including operation of

various mining equipment, excavation, transportation, etc. The overall impact of noise due to

various sources can be predicted using hemispherical model for sound wave propagation:

LPQ = LW + DIQ - 20 log r - Ae - 8 dB(A)

where

LPQ- sound pressure level at a receiver located in the direction and distance `r' from the

source;

LW - sound pressure level of the source;

DIQ- directivity index of the source (for hemispherical radiation DI = 8 dB(A)).

r - distance of receiver from the source (m);

Ae - represents excess attenuation of the sound produced by factors such as;

- absorption in air;

- effect of rain, wind and fog;

- reflection and refraction at barriers and buildings;

- effect of the terrain, grass, shrubs, trees, etc., and

- effect of wind and temperature.

The absorption of sound in the air is generally by molecular and viscous actions and is a

complex phenomenon. In general, the sound pressure level decreases by 6 dB(A) for each

doubling of the distance.

The cumulative impact of various sources at a particular location is calculated by using the

logarithmic absorption model as:

LP (Total) = 10 log (10 LPQ1/10 + 10 LPQ2/10 + ------).

Noise due to operation of various mining equipmentThe various sources of noise in the operation stage of Giral lignite mine is excavation, land

grading, vehicular movement, etc. The noise levels generated by these sources are given in

Table-5.7.


WAPCOS Limited 5-8

Table-5.7: Noise level due to various sources------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S. No. Source Value dB(A))------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. Showels and dumpers combined 1002. Graders 903. Front End Loader 924. Excavator 965. Tipper 1036. Dozer 957. Motor Grader 1118. Pump set (2 Nos.) 95----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The noise level in the mine operation phase has been predicted for the worst scenario which

envisages that all the equipment are operating at a common point. The noise levels at

various distances from the proposed Giral lignite mine during mining activities are given in

Table-5.8.

Table-5.8: Predicted noise levels due to the proposed Giral lignite mine---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Distance Ambient Noise Incremental increase in the Increased ambient noise

Level * ambient noise level due to level mining activitiesthe mining activities

(m) (dB(A) (dB(A) dB(A)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(A) (B) (C) (D)=(B+C)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5 45 59 10410 45 53 9815 45 49 9420 45 47 9250 45 39 84

100 45 33 78200 45 27 72300 45 23 68500 45 19 64

1000 45 13 581500 45 9 542000 45 8 532500 45 6 513000 45 5 504000 45 4 49---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* The ambient noise level in the study area of various mines ranges from 40 to 45 dB(A).

Prediction of impacts on nearby villagesIn the pre-project phase, the noise level is 40 to 45 dB(A). The increase in noise levels at a

distance of 500 m, 1000 m, 1500 m 2000, 2500 and 3000 m from each of the two mines is

expected as 19 dB(A), 13 dB(A), 9 dB(A), 8 dB(A), 6 dB(A), and 5 dB(A) respectively, in the


WAPCOS Limited 5-9

worst scenario without any control. The nearest habitations are atleast 2-3 km away. Hence,

the increase in ambient noise levels will be about 5 to 8 dB(A) which is insignificant. It would

be worthwhile to mention here that in absence of the data on actual location of various

construction equipment, all the equipment have been assumed to operate at a common

point. This assumption leads to over-estimation of the increase in noise levels. It is a known

fact that there is a reduction in noise level as the sound wave passes through a barrier.

The transmission loss values for common construction materials is given in Table-5.9.

Table-5.9: Transmission loss values for various construction material--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Material Thickness (inches) Decrease in noise level (dB(A))--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Light concrete 4 38

6 39Dense Concrete 4 40Brick 4 33Granite 4 40--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Thus, the walls of houses will attenuate at least 30 dB(A) of noise. In addition, there are

attenuation due to the following factors:

Air absorption Vegetal foliage Atmospheric in homogeneties and atmospheric turbulence.

Thus no increase in noise levels are anticipated as a result of various activities due to

operation of various mining equipment.

Impacts on labourThe effect of high noise levels on the mine operating personnel, has to be considered as this

may be particularly harmful. It is known that continuous exposures to high noise levels above

90 dB(A) affects the hearing acuity of the workers/operators and hence, should be avoided.

Other physiological and psychological effects have also been reported in literature, but the

effect on hearing acuity has been specially stressed. IS:7194 (1982) gives the probability

figures for loss of hearing as a function of total exposure period. To prevent these effects, it

has been recommended by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) that the

exposure period of affected persons be limited as in Table 5.10.

Table-5.10: Maximum Exposure Periods as per OSHAMaximum equivalent continuousnoise level (dB(A))

Unprotected exposure period perday for an 8 hrs/day and 5 days/week

90 895 4100 2105 1110 ½115 ¼120 No exposure permitted at or above this level


WAPCOS Limited 5-10

If it becomes necessary for any worker working in high noise area (above 90 dB(A) their duty

hours should be restricted to the period stated in Table-5.10. Alternatively, they can be

provided with effective personal protective measures such as ear muffs or ear plugs to be

worn during periods of high noise exposure.

The noise levels during various mining activities have been compared to various standards

prescribed by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), which are being

implemented in our country through rules framed under Factories Act. It can e observed

(Refer Table-5.10) that for an 8 hour duration, equivalent noise level exposure should be

less than 90 dB(A).

The Director General of Mines Safety in its circular no. DG(Tech)/18 of 1975, has prescribed

the noise level in mining operations for workers in 8 hour shift period with unprotected ear as

90 dB(A) or less. The workers working in or near shovel, dumpers and other equipment are

expected to be exposed to noise levels greater than 90 dB(A). The exposure to workers

working in these areas should be limited to 6 to 8 hours. In addition, they also need to be

provided with ear plugs. Thus, increased noise levels due to drilling are not expected to

adversely affect the workers operating the drill or involved in other mining activities closely.

5.4 IMPACTS ON WATER ENVIRONMENTWater requirementsThe total drinking water requirements for Giral Lignite Mine have been estimated as 155

m3/day. The details are given in Table-5.11.

Table-5.11: Details of Drinking Water RequirementsS. No. Purpose Quantity (m3/ day)

1 Drinking water @ 5 lpcd for 1000 person 52 Colony 1500 person @ 100 lpcd 150

Total 155

The water requirements for dust suppression for road is 30 m3/dy per km. The average

length is 1.166 km. Thus, total water requirements for dust suppression for roads in Giral

lignite mine works out to 35 m3/day.

The total water requirements have been estimated as 190 m3/day. The details are given in

Table-5.12.

Table-5.12: Water requirement at Giral lignite mineS. No. Use Water requirement (m3/day)1. Drinking Water & Colony 155.02. Dust suppression for roads & Plantation 35.0

Total 190 m3/day


WAPCOS Limited 5-11

Sewage generationThe sewage generation has been assumed as 80% of total water supplied for meeting

domestic use, i.e. (0.8 x 155) 124 m3/day. The disposal of untreated sewage could lead to

water pollution and associated public health problems. The typical composition of untreated

sewage is given in Table-5.13.

Table-5.13: Typical composition of untreated domestic waste waterS.No. Parameters Value1. Total Solids, mg/l 7202. Total Dissolved Solids, mg/l 5003. Total Suspended Solids, mg/l 2204. BOD, mg/l 2205. Oil and grease, mg/l 1006. Alkalinity, (as CaCO3), mg/l 1007. Total Phosphorus, mg/l 88. Total Nitrogen, mg/l 409. Bicarbonates, mg/l 10010. Carbonates, mg/l 1011. Chlorides, mg/l 5012. Nitrates, mg/l 4013. Phosphates, mg/l 4014. Sulphates, mg/l 3015. Calcium, mg/l 4016. Magnesium, mg/l 4017. Potassium, mg/l 1518. Sodium, mg/l 70

The BOD, TDS, etc. are some of the parameters which are quite high in an untreated

sewage. The sewage requires treatment before disposal, so that no major problems of water

pollution are encountered. As a part of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlined

in Chapter-6 of this Report, appropriate sewage treatment measures have been suggested.

Impacts on groundwaterThe depth of mining shall be upto 85 m and the water table is ranging between 90 to 110 m.

5.5 IMPACTS ON LAND ENVIRONMENTThe total area leased for the mine for increased production level is 2655.7 ha. The major

impact on land environment during mining operation is due to disposal of overburden over

non-mineral bearing area. The details of overburden generated during mine life years of

mine operation are given in Table-5.14.

Table- 5.14: Proposed lignite production & overburden generation as per approvedmining plan


Overburden(lakh m3)

Remarks

Upto 5th year 4.77 632.00 Backfilling is proposedfrom 6th years onward.6th – 10th year 5.00 725.00

11th – 15th year 5.00 725.0016th – 20th year 5.00 700.00


WAPCOS Limited 5-12


Overburden(lakh m3)

Remarks

21st – 25th year 5.00 650.0026th – 30th year 5.00 600.0031st – 35th year 3.68 438.00

Total 33.45 4470.00

The Conceptual mining plan was prepared by considering mine life of 35 years with a lignite

production of @ 5.0 lakh MT from Jalela, @ 3.0 Lakh MT from Giral and @ 2.0 Lakh MT

from Thumbli block showing mine configuration at the end of 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th year

respectively. The back filled area was also shown accordingly. The details of overburden

generation for first five years of operation are given in Table-5.15.

Table-5.15:First five year overburden disposal as per approved mining plan(November 2004 version)

Year OB in lakh m3 Base area inha.

Height and no.of lift

Remarks

1.Giral BlockFirst year* 39.20 Nil - BackfillingSecond year 39.20 -do-Third year 39.20 Nil - -do-Fourth year 39.20 Nil - -do-Fifth year 39.20 Nil - -do-Sub Total 196.0 - - -2.Jalilo Block

First year 56.50 31.5 7.5m, 3 lifts Ht. 22.5 mSecond year 64.50 27.0 7.5m, 4 lifts Ht. 30.0 mThird year 64.50 15.5 7.5m, 3 lifts Ht 22.5 m*Fourth year 64.50 25.8 7.5m, 4 lifts Ht 30.0 m*Fifth year 64.50 * Back filling proposedTotal 314.50 99.8 Ha3.Thumbli BlockFirst year 22.30 11.0Second year 24.80 5.5Third Year 24.80 5.5Fourth year 24.80 * Backfilling proposed in 2nd yearFifth year 24.80 *Total 121.50 22.0 ha*1st year means 2004-05

Top Soil DisposalThe topsoil stacking is proposed near each block respectively. The height of stack shall be

5.0 m. The quantity and area required for all three topsoil stacks is as given in Table-5.16

and 5.17.


WAPCOS Limited 5-13

Table-5.16: First five year top soil disposal as per approved mining plan (November2004 version)

Year Topsoil in lakh m3 Area for topsoil (ha)First 1.0 2.4

Second 1.0 2.4Third 1.0 2.4

Fourth 1.0 2.4Fifth 1.0 2.4Total 5.0 12.0

Table-5.17 :Sub-block wise quantity of top soil generated and stacking area requiredBlock Volume Mcum Area, Ha*Giral 3.31 5Jalilo 2.78 4.5

Thumbli 1.50 2.5Total 7.59 12.0

Only part of the volume of the top soil generated will be required to be accommodated in the

stacks while the rest will be either carpeted concurrent with mining or temporarily stacked

over the backfilled area before laying over the backfilled area. The barren area on the south

of the Jalilo block no. 1 has been proposed as the dump site. Waste dump has been

proposed in three lifts each of 7.5 m, with individual lift angle of 45o and overall angle of 27o

during the first five year period. The inactive slopes of the waste dump lift shall be graded for

compaction and stabilizing the dump.

The dumping of overburden shall start from north to south direction by taking first lift of 7.5

as the wind direction is south-west and north-east. To minimise the quantum of dust

generation, 30 m high dump shall be taken into four lifts of 7.5 m instead of 3 lifts of 10 m, as

in deserts, wind velocity in summer is high and height of dumping edge effects the dust

generation. After building up of first lift of sufficient height, next lift shall be built up

immediately by dumping overburden for 2nd lift. In similar way, third lift shall be built up. The

fourth and final lift has been proposed in the second half of the 3rd and 4th year.

The decoaled area of mine will be backfilled by dumping overburden on it. As the mine

advances, decoaled area shall be available for backfilling in successive years. The bottom

bench inside dumping will start from the second half of the 3rd year, when sufficient area

would have been decoaled with 55 m of depth from the surface. The bench height in inside

dumping has been proposed as 12 m, with a width of about 30 m. The distance between

bottom most bench of inside dump and active mining face shall be kept around 80 m, to take

care of alignment of drainage system, movement of various machineries, etc.

5.6 IMPACTS ON ECOLOGYThe total lease area of Giral lignite mine is 2655.70 ha. Majority of the land has already been

acquired during first phase of mining operation. However, additional land of 548.65 ha is


WAPCOS Limited 5-14

required for the expansion of the mine lease area. No forest land is to be acquired for the

proposed project.

Impacts due to fugitive emissionsThe fugitive emissions, which are expected to be entrained during mining operation, is likely

to settle down within a distance of 200-300 m from the mine. The particulate matter is likely

to settle down on vegetation, within an area of 200-300 m from its origin. This phenomena

can block the available light and affect the photosynthetic activity of plants. In some of the

plants, it may block stomata, resulting in reduced transpiration. Since, there is no significant

vegetation in the area, impacts on this account is not expected to be significant. Adequate

measures have also been recommended as a part of the Environmental Management Plan

(EMP) to prevent entrainment of fugitive dust. Thus, adverse impacts on ecology are not

expected to be significant.

Impacts on faunaNo major wildlife is found in the project study area. The area does not form part of any

National Park or wildlife sanctuary. Likewise the area does not form part of the migratory

route of any wildlife species. Thus no adverse impacts on fauna are anticipated as a result of

the proposed mine.

5.7 IMPACTS OF REHABILITATION AND RECLAIMATION WORKSRSMML had got initiated a study through Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI) to

assess the Rehabilitation of Lignite Mine Disturbed Area in Giral mine. The key objectives of

the study were to monitor :

- survival of suitable species of grasses and woody perennials.

- efficacy of rehabilitation for amelioration of adverse environmental impacts.

The efficacy of rehabilitation was assessed in terms of

Natural regeneration

Growing of crops

Vegetables on rehabilitated surface

Various sites were studied which are listed as below:

Site-1: Backfilled site overlain with 30 cm thick layer of native soil and murrum,

planted in September 1999.

Site-2: Backfilled site overlain with 30 cm thick layer of native soil and murrum on 5%

slope for micro catchment water harvesting, planted in September 1999.

Site-3: Backfilled site overlain with 45 cm thick layer of native soil and murrum on 5%

slope for micro catchment water harvesting, planted in September 1999.

Site-4: Backfilled site overlain with 60cm thick layer of native soil and murrum,

planted in March 2001.


WAPCOS Limited 5-15

Site-5: Backfilled with overlain with 60 cm thick layer of native soil and murrum,

planted in September 2001.

Natural regenerationRehabilitated site has become favourable niche for a large number of plant species, which

came up on their own (Refer Table-5.18). These include grasses, herbs (leguminous, non-

leguminous, wood, perennial), shrubs (leguminous, non-leguminous, woody), Trees,

Sedges, Creepers, etc. In the year 2001, the maximum number of species i.e. 75 appeared

backfilled site with 60 cm thick soil layer planted in March 2001, followed by 62 species at

backfill with 45 cm soil layer and then in control (51). There were 15 species which appeared

on murrum layer and half moons at the dump yard. Maximum species of grasses were also

noted in March 2001 plantation, wherein Desmostachya bipinnata flowered and set seeds.

The Cenchrus ciliaris sown in the monsoon of 2001 also flowered and set seeds. Tamarix

aphylla regenerated copiously to form colonies. Due to severe drought in 2002, the number

of naturally regenerated species also declined in all treatments but increased in 2003.

Successional status of naturally regenerated speciesThis is true of a recently vegetated system wherein rapid turnover of annual species takes

place. Finally, species of mid – or higher successional level appear indicating that the sub –

or climax species have finally taken hold. Site 4 and 5 planted in March, 2001 and July, 2001

have predominance of species of early to mid succession status. These could be grouped in-

to two types : 1. Transient type (Appearing in first year or second year and then disappear)

and 2. Consistent type (which appear in few number of consistently hold on in further years).

Examples of the first type are all the species of Eragrostis, Cenchrus biflorus, Corchrosus

tridense and Bracharia ramose. The consistent types included Eragrostis ciliaris,

Dactyloctenium aegyptium, Fagonia cretica, Convolvulus microphyllus which keep on

appearing in all the three year of sampling, indicating that these have been permanent hold

over these habitats.


WAPCOS Limited 5-16

Table-5.18: Naturally regenerated plant species and planted species at rehabilitated backfill Giral, BarmerS.No.

Type ofvegetation

Site-1 Site-2 Site-3 Site-4 Site-52001 2002 2003 2001 2002 2003 2001 2002 2003 2001 2002 2003 2001 2002 2003

1. Grassperennial

4 1 2 6 3 3 6 1 3 9 1 1 5 1 -

2. Gras annual 8 3 10 8 5 10 8 3 9 13 3 6 11 5 53. Herbs

leguminous4 1 3 8 - 5 3 - 3 8 - 5 2 - 5

4. Herbs non-leguminous

9 - 3 13 1 2 7 1 4 15 2 5 11 1 3

5. Herbswoody/perennial

5 1 1 3 1 - 3 - - 7 3 3 6 - -

6. Shrubsleguminous

6 4 1 7 3 1 5 4 1 5 4 1 2 1 1

7. Shrubs non-leguminous/woody/perennial

2 3 4 9 4 2 4 5 3 9 3 2 5 2 -

8. Treeleguminous

3 2 - 3 2 - - - 3 4 3 - 2 2 -

9. Tree non-leguminous

2 2 - 2 2 - 1 2 - 1 1 - 2 1 -

10. Sedges 1 1 - 2 1 2 1 - 1 1 1 - 1 - -11. Creepers 1 - - 1 - - 1 - - 3 - - 2 - -

Total 45 18 24 62 22 25 39 16 27 75 21 23 49 12 14


5-17WAPCOS Limited

Disappearance of transient successionals paved the way for sub climax and climax level

species after 2-3 growing seasons. Hence such species are more in plantations of 1999 and

2000. These included Cenchrus setigerus, C. ciliaris, Chloris virgata, Sehima nervosum,

Eleusine compressa, Indigofera cordifolia and Zygophyllum simplex.

Abundant occurrence of sub climax and climax species in 2-3 years old plots and those of

mid successional species in 1-2 year old plots clearly proved that the rehabilitation has

effectively started the process of natural regeneration leading slowly to climax vegetation

formation characteristic of this area.

Cultivation of Pearl Millet and Cluster Bean in the Backfill areaSuccessful raising of trees and growth of natural vegetation suggested that conditions have

become sufficiently mild and it may be possible to grow crops at backfilled site. An attempt

was made by CAZRI to grow cluster bean sand pearl millet on backfilled area between at

two sites (i) between the block of Parkinsonia and (ii) between the block of Tamarix. Both the

crops were grown under the following treatments:

(i) control(ii) urea 40 kg ha-1

(iii) 2.5 ton Farm Yard. Manure (FYM) ha-1

(iv) 5.0 ton FYM ha-1

(v) 10.0ton FYM ha-1

(vi) 2.5 ton FYM ha-1 + 40 kg urea N ha-1

(vii) 5 ton FYM ha-1 + 40 kg urea N ha-1

(viii) 10 ton FYM ha-1 + 40 kg urea N ha-1

Crops were sown after rainfall. Both the crops germinated normally but survival and growth

of most of the cluster bean plants was poor. On the other hand pearl millet plants grew with

time. Better growth of pearl millet in comparison to cluster bean may be attributed to its

higher salt tolerance. However, the growth was poor as well as patchy. One reason for this

could be low rainfall as only 140 mm rainfall was received in two events after sowing and as

the surface was not uniformly leveled, which could have affected the distribution of moisture.

The other reason could be high variation in soil EC which in Tamarix block ranged from 0.3

to 12.2 dSm-1. As consequence there was a remarkable variation in the stover yield within

each plot. Stover yields obtained in the experiment are shown in Table-5.19. Stover yield

after application of urea or manure was in general higher than control but the differences

between treatments did not follow specific trend which may be attributed to variations in soil

properties and moisture distribution.

Since application of nitrogen in the form of urea increased stover yield in the above

experiment, as a next step effect of application of different types/sources of nitrogen on yield

of pearl millet was studied by CAZRI. Urea, ammonium sulphate, potassium nitrate and

ammonium nitrate @ 60 kg N per ha. were applied. Stover yield was maximum in Potassium


5-18WAPCOS Limited

nitrate treatment (Refer Table-5.20) followed by ammonium nitrate, ammonium sulphate and

urea.

Table-5.19: Stover yield of pearl millet (kg ha-1) grown in Parkinsonia and Tamarixblock at backfill

Treatment Tamarix block Parkinsonia blockControl 147.77Urea 40 kh N ha-1 311.11 267.82.5 ton manure ha-1 151.1 282.55 ton manure ha-1 275.3 316.710 ton manure ha-1 227.7 255.62.5 ton manure ha-1 372.2 266.75 ton manure ha-1 + 40 Kg urea N 250.0 427.710 ton manure ha-1 + 40 Kg urea N 138.8 294.4

Table-5.20: Stover yield of pearl millet (kg ha-1) grown in Parkinsonia block at backfill(2003-2004) under different nitrogen sources (60 kg N/ha. in two splits)

Treatment Parkinsonia blockDry matter (kg ha-1) % +/-over control

Control 537.2Urea 444.4 -17.3Amm. Sulphate 748.9 +39.4Potassium Nitrate 1028.8 +91.4Amm. Nitrate 1004.1 +86.91

It can be concluded that :

Nitrogen application is beneficial for Bajra growth. Potassium nitrate was best source of nitrogen closely followed by ammonium nitrate.

Vegetable cultivation on Backfilled areaWith maturity of soil overlying the spoil at backfill, it was surmised that it should be grown

desert cucurbits/vegetables.

Following species were selected :

Kachra (Cucumis melo var. Momordica) Matira (Citrullus lanatus) Tindsi (Citrullus fistulosus)

Seeds of above three species were broadcasted during monsoon months in inter-row

spaces and some were dibbled in the main pit where tree/shrub roots have gone deeper

making surface moisture available for vegetable growth.

Two months after rains, in September 2003 end, the entire area was full of twines of these

plants showing huge fruiting. A total of 1885 twines of Kachra, Matira and Tindsi were

counted. Even with ½ kg fruit yield per twine, the total yield was nearly 94 kg of desert

vegetable per ha. This proved the success of rehabilitation, which also ameliorated the land

surface.


5-19WAPCOS Limited

A similar rehabilitation works shall continue after the proposed expansion of Giral lignite

mine as well.

5.8 IMPACTS ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENTAcquisition of Private landsNo additional land is to be acquired for the project, as in the present proposal only renewal

of lease is envisaged. Thus, R&R issues are not anticipated.

Employment potentialAbout 475 persons will get direct employment and about 1500 persons will get indirect

employment due to the development of the proposed expansion of capacity of the existing

infrastructural facilities in the Giral lignite mine shall be developed for mining operation is

another positive impact. During operation of the mine, a large number of people are likely to

come in the area, for various mining related activities. Lot of allied activities are likely to be

developed, which could include small shops, workshops, restaurants, etc. which will also

improve the economic status and employment level of the local population.


6-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-6ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

6.1 GENERALThe evaluation of impacts of the proposed project, on the overall environment as worked out in

Chapter-6 and has revealed some adverse impacts on important environmental parameters. In

this Chapter, an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is outlined to ameliorate or reduce the

anticipated negative impacts, through suitable mitigative measures.

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) details the methods and procedures to achieve

the stated environmental targets and objectives. The EMP addresses both the short-term

targets and long-term objectives.

The EMP to be implemented in each of the proposed mine area can be divided into the

following categories:

Air environment Noise control measures Water environment Land environment Greenbelt development.

6.2 AIR ENVIRONMENTThe emissions from various sources are more or less of uniform size and distribution and there

is not much reduction in average particle size in the air with distance from the source. The

following measures are recommended to control air pollution:

Dust is the major source of pollutant and is likely to be entrained due to excavation,transportation, dumping, etc. The dust emissions will be controlled at the source itself, asfar as possible, by water sprinkling. It is proposed that areas like roads leading fromworking face to waste dumps, lignite stock pile, etc. should be periodically sprayed withwater to prevent entrainment of dust.

Most of the dust excavated is expected from inside the pit area, and is not expected tosignificantly affect large area. Greenbelt is proposed to be developed around wastedumps, along the haul roads, around the mine pit and other infrastructural facilitiesproposed to be developed as a part of the mine development.

Good preventive maintenance schedule is proposed to be followed for variousequipment to reduce the control exhaust gas emission levels and quality.

Haulage roads to be black topped.

Operators and staff in dust prone areas will be provided with face masks equipped withfilters to prevent inhalation of dust.


6-2WAPCOS Limited

In the proposed mine, water sprays and greenbelt development are proposed to reduce the air

pollution. Dust is the most significant pollutant in mining operation which is generated during

excavation, transportation, dumping, vehicular movement, etc. The most efficient method to

reduce dust pollution is to control the dust at the source itself. The sprinkling of water at the

excavated sites, storage piles, overburden dumps, etc. will reduce the dust pollution to a large

extent.

The haul roads will be maintained properly and the permanent roads will be black topped to

prevent dust pollution. For other temporary roads leading to the excavation site, overburden

areas, etc., water spraying will be done. The other measures to prevent degradation of ambient

air quality are categorised as below:

Measures to prevent generation and disposal of dust. Measures to control pollution due to air borne dust. Measures to be adopted during various mining operation.

Measures to prevent generation and disposal of dustMeasures recommended to prevent generation and disposal of dust are given as below:

- water spray for dust suppression system or roads which shall be used by vehicles fortransportation of lignite and to meet other requirements.

- water spray for dust suppression at loading faces.- use of sharp teeth of shovels to prevent entrainment of dust.

Measures to control pollution due to air borne dustMeasures to be adopted are listed as below:

suppression of dust fumes generated at the time of shattering and disintegration in strataby watering.

greenbelt development at various locations including overburden disposal area, minepits, haulage roads, etc.

Measures to be adopted during various mining operationsRecommended measures to control air pollution during various mining activities are given as

below:

Regular maintenance of vehicles and using equipment to minimize emissions. Labour involved in mining activities to be provided with face masks.

It shall be compulsory for all vehicles involved in mining and related operations to operate with

Pollution Under Control Certificate.


6-3WAPCOS Limited

a) Dust suppression systems (like water spraying) is adopted at:

- Faces while loading

- Dust suppression system (like water spraying) at roads used for transportation.Sprinklers (Whirling) installed along the roads to suppress the dust.

- Transport vehicles is maintained leak proof

- Transfer points of lignite are provided with appropriate hoods/chutes to prevent fugitivedust emission.

- Use of sharp teeth of shovels to prevent entrainment of dust.

- Suppression of dust fumes generated at the time of shattering and disintegration instrata by watering.

- Greenbelt development at various locations including overburden disposal area, minepits, haulage roads etc.

b) Preventing dispersal of air borne dust- To prevent air pollution due to airborne dust, dense tree belts are planted around the

mine and sites housing crushing and loading facilities and dust masks are provided as

safety measure to the workers, engaged at dust generation points like drills (rarely to be

utilized), loading / unloading points, crushers /feeder breakers etc.

- The concentration of CO in the ambient air is negligible and is far below the prescribed

limit of CPCB and is not anticipated to exceed it in future. The mine ambient air quality

will be regularly tested to detect the presence of any pollutants above prescribed limits

and appropriate measures are adopted.

6.3 NOISE CONTROL MEASURESAs discussed in Chapter-5, there will be marginal increase in the ambient noise levels up to

about 1 km from the mine. The increased level of noise is not expected to have any significant

adverse impact on ambient noise levels. However, efforts would be made to reduce noise

emanating during mining operations.

Noise can be mitigated by curbing emissions at the source, controlling the pollution source, and

controlling the use of land around them to reduce the impact of emissions. However, unlike air

and water pollution noise does not accumulates but dissipates, within a short time and distance

from its point of generation. The approach to mitigation of noise levels therefore, can be two

pronged. First measures can be devised to mitigate noise at source, secondly measures to

reduce noise level at specific receiving points can be thought of.

The effect of high noise levels on the mine staff is to be considered as likely to be particularly

harmful. It is known that continuous exposure to high noise levels above 90 dB(A) affects the

hearing acuity of the workers/operators and hence has to be avoided. Other physiological and


6-4WAPCOS Limited

psychological effects have also been reported in literature, but the effect on hearing acuity has

been specially stressed. IS: 7194 (1982) gives the probability figures for loss of hearing as a

function of total exposure period. To prevent these effects, it has been recommended by

international specialist organisations that the exposure period of affected persons be limited as

specified in Table-6.10. Alternatively, they should be provided with effective personal protective

measures such as ear muffs or ear plugs to be worn during periods of exposure.

The other measures to control noise could be as follows:

- Equipment and machineries should be maintained regularly to keep the noise generation atthe design level;

- Silencers and mufflers of the individual machineries to be regularly checked;

- Yearly audiometric survey on workers exposed to high noise levels should be undertaken.

- Exposure to whole-body-vibration and higher noise level near trenches and excavators mustcontrolled by maintenance of these machineries.

- Greenbelt development at various sites.

6.4 WATER ENVIRONMENTDisposal of runoffThe source of water pollution will be mainly washouts from excavated quarry benches and other

quarry areas. At no point, during operations of Giral Lignite mine, the ground water will be

intercepted. Thus, overall quantity of water flow in the mine area is marginal.

There are minor drains or nallas in this area and the natural water course drain takes out the

water from the surrounding areas into the main natural drain. During monsoon months, the

drains are full with monsoon runoff. In rest of the year, however, these drains remain dry. To

channelise the pumped out water from the mine pit and surface runoff in a particular direction

and collection of this water for further use in a storage pond, a systematic layout of drain has

been proposed. However, to prevent the accumulation of rain water in pits and cavities, a

drainage system. This will avoid mine flooding at any time and prevent accumulation of water.

The surface drains along the mine periphery will be so aligned to allow the flow of water under

gravity so that water flows away from the mine and does not seep back into the mine. As the

quantity of rainfall is very less in the project area, the overall quantity of water to be pumped

from the mine pit and through runoff is very less. The proposed drainage system is sufficient.


6-5WAPCOS Limited

The cost for above referred measures, has been included in the development of mine, hence

has not been covered in the cost required for implementation of Environmental Management

Plan.

Runoff from stack pilesAnother source of water pollution will be mainly washouts from excavated quarry benches,

various stack piles, other quarry areas. During rains, the drains are full with runoff. In rest of the

year, however, these drains remain dry. A drainage system needs to be designed as per the

topography of the mine. The garland drains as suggested earlier will be so aligned, so as to

allow water to flow under gravity.

Other measuresAdequate measures to protect the mine workings from surface water flow during the rains will

be taken by way of providing garland drains around the mine excavations and also providing

suitable drainage gradients for mine benches. It is proposed to maintain a gradient of 1 or 2o for

drainage of water on the bench floors and construction of water drains using local material to

prevent soil erosion and uncontrolled descent of water.

Wash off from the oil/grease handling area of workshop are treated to remove oil & grease

using oil trap. Waste oil / grease are stored in leak proof containers and sold to authorized

vendors.

Sewage TreatmentThe sewage from the mine lease area shall be treated in a septic tank and disposed through

absorption trenches. An amount of Rs. 4.0 lakh has been earmarked for construction of septic

tank.

The sewage generated from the project colony shall be treated in a septic tank and disposed

through absorption trenches. An amount of Rs. 10 lakh has been earmarked for this purpose.

6.5 LAND ENVIRONMENTMining operations, generate considerable quantities of overburden depending upon the nature

of occurrence of the deposit, topography of the area, method of mining adopted, etc. Thus, solid

waste management is an essential component of any mining operation. Disposal of overburden

and waste is proposed to be done at pre-determined locations within the lease area.

The total area excavated in Giral mine till 2013-14 is 286.81 ha. The total area to be excavated

in the entire mine life of 37 years is 1100.77 ha. About 133.31 ha of area shall be used for

overburden disposal. In the entire mine life of 37 years, the total area to be excavated shall be

1100.77 ha and the total area to be reclaimed shall be 888.20 ha.


6-6WAPCOS Limited

As per the Mine Plan, backfilling is to commence from 4th year of mining operation. The area to

be reclaimed by backfilling in first five years shall be about 20 ha. The Year/Stagewise Area

excavated during mine life, details are given in Table-6.1.

Table-6.1: Year/Stagewise Area Excavated during mine life (As per MCP)Year Calendar Year Area excavated (ha)



The overburden areas will be stabilized by growing trees and grasses. The total overburden

disposal area to be stabilized shall be 133.31 ha. An amount of Rs.100,000/ha is recommended

for stabilization of overburden disposal areas by growing trees and grasses. The total amount to

be spent shall be Rs.133.31 lakh. The details of physical and financial targets for stabilization of

overburden areas is given in Table-6.2.

Table-6.2: Details of Overburden Generation / Disposal during Mine Life(As per Mine Closure Plan)

Year Calendar Year OB (B)Mcum

Area(ha)

OB disposed toSurface Dump (B)

Mcum

OB backfilled(B) Mcum

Prog Cummu Prog ProggSince Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 27 35.48 7.94 18.36

10th 2004-05 to 2013-14 80 62.36 12.49 66.0615th 2014-15 to 2018-19 70 35.47 6.52 61.5720th 2019-20 to 2023-24 71 0 0 70.2925th 2024-25 to 2028-29 71 0 0 70.2730th 2029-30 to 2033-34 71 0 0 70.7135th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 70 0 0 69.0837th** 2040-2041 14 0 0 13.61



6-7WAPCOS Limited

Topsoil StackingThe topsoil stacking is proposed near each block respectively. The height of stack shall be 5.0

m. The quantity of top soil generated and stacking area required for all three topsoil stacks is as

given below in Table-6.3.

Table-6.3 :Sub-block wise quantity of top soil generated and stacking area requiredBlock Volume (Mm3) Area (ha)Giral 3.31 5Jalilo 2.78 4.5

Thumbli 1.50 2.5Total 7.59 12.0

Only part of the volume of the top soil generated will be required to be accommodated in the

stacks while the rest will be either carpeted concurrent with mining or temporarily stacked over

the backfilled area before laying over the backfilled area.

Reclamation PlanThe soil is brown to pale brown in colour moderately coarse in texture with a shallow depth. It is

susceptible to moderate to severe erosion. It is occasionally suited for agriculture.

The soil in the project is more of less sandy in texture, covered with loose sand, hummocks and

sand dunes. The soils are brown to pale brown in colour, fine sand to loamy fine sand in texture.

Due to scarcity of rains, the vegetate cover on the surface and organic matter in the soils is

liable to wind erosion.

Before excavating the 1st OB bench 1.0m top soil will be scrapped separately and stacked in low

height (<5 m) near each block respectively over an area of 12 ha. It will be used for laying over

dumps and backfills before afforestation. Total volume of top soil generated will be 25-30 lakh

m3 and during the 1st five years of the mine it will be 5 lakh m3, which will be covered with

leguminous species for preserving soil nutrients and biomes The process of laying top soil over

final dump stage will continue all through mining and management of dumping areas before

undertaking afforestation. Technical reclamation will be done with the help of machines like

dozers and levelling the waste disposal area scientifically before laying the top soil. The idea is

to bring as much land available for afforestation and near to original and improved stage as the

mine comes to the closure stage.

From 4th year onwards, the backfilling would start. After backfilling, the area will be compacted,

suitably sloped and reclaimed by growing trees and grass. The expenditure shall be

Rs.100,000/ha. The reclamation process would continue for three years. A total area of 1100.77


6-8WAPCOS Limited

ha would be reclaimed in the entire mine life. The reclamation plan along with physical targets is

given in Table-6.4.

Table-6.4: Yearwise Physical and Financial Targets for Mine Reclamation Plan(As per Mine Closure Plan)

Year Physical target (ha)1st to 10th year 286.8111th to 15th year 238.1916th to 20th year 174.9821st to 25th year 178.7726th to 30th year 104.1731st to 35th year 98.9536th to 37th year 18.90 19.6Total 1100.77

RSMML had got a study conducted through Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI) to

assess the rehabilitation of Lignite Mine Disturbed area in Giral mine. The key objective of the

study is survival of suitable species of grasses and woody perennials efficacy of rehabilitation

for amelioration of adverse environmental impact.

The efficacy of rehabilitation was assessed in terms of

Natural regeneration Growing of crops Vegetables or rehabilitated surface

This is true of a recently vegetated system wherein rapid turnover of annual species takes

place. Finally, species of mid – or higher succession level appear indicating that the sub – or

climax species have finally taken hold. Site 4 and 5 planted in March, 2001 and July, 2001 has

predominance of species of early to mid succession status. These could be grouped in to two

types. 1 transient type (appearing in first or second year and then disappear) and 2 consistent

type (which appear in few number of consistently hold on in further years). Examples of the first

type are all the species of Eragrostis, Cenchrus biflorus, Corchrosus tridense and Bracharia

ramose. The consistent types included Eragrostis ciliaris, Dactyloctenium ageyptium, Fagonia

cretica convolvulus microphyllus which keep on appearing in all the three year of sampling,

indicating that these have been permanent hold over these habitats.

Disappearance of transient successions paved the way of sub climax and climax level species

after 2-3 growing seasons. Hence such species are more in plantations of 1999 and 2000.

These included cenchrus setigerus, C. Ciliaris, Chloris Virgata, Sehima nervosum, Eleusine

compressa, indigofera cordifolia and Zygophylium simplex.


6-9WAPCOS Limited

Abundant occurrence of sub climax and climax species in 2-3 years old plots and those of mid

succession species in 1-2 year old plots clearly proved that the rehabilitation has effectively

started the process of natural regeneration leading slowly to climax vegetation formation

characteristic of this area.

Cultivation of pearl millet and cluster bean in the backfill area.

Successful raising of trees and growth of natural vegetation suggested that conditions have

become sufficiently mild and it may be possible to grow crops at backfilled site. An attempt was

made by CAZRI to grow cluster bean sand pearl millet on backfilled area between at two sites

(i) between the block of parkinsoina and (ii) between the block of Tamarix. Both the crops were

grown under the following treatments.

Control Urea 40 kg ha-1

2.5 ton farm yard. Manuree (FYM) ha-1

5.0 ton FYM ha -1

10.0 ton FYM ha -1

2.5 ton FYM ha -1 + 40 kg urea N ha -1

5 ton FYM ha -1 40 kg urea N ha -1

10 ton FYM ha -1 + 40 kg urea N ha -1

Crops were sown after rainfall both the crops germinated normally but survival and growth of

most of the cluster bean plants was poor. On the other hand pearl millet plants grew with time.

Better growth of pearl millet in comparison to cluster been may be attributed to its higher salt

tolerance. However, the growth was poor as well as patchy. One reason for this could be low

rainfall as only 140 mm rainfall was received in two events after sowing and as the surface was

not uniformly levelled, which could have affected the distribution of moisture. The other reason

could be high variation in soil EC which in Tamarix block ranged from 0.3 to 12.2 dSm-1. Stover

yield after application of urea or manure was in general higher than control but the differences

between treatments did not follow specific trend which may be attributed to variations in sol

properties and moisture distribution.

Urea, ammonium sulphate, potassium nitrate and ammonium nitrate @ 60 kg N per ha were

applied. Stover yield was maximum in potassium nitrate treatment by ammonium nitrate,

ammonium sulphate and urea.

Nitrogen application is beneficial for Bijra growth. Potassium nitrate was best source of nitrogen closely followed by ammonium nitrate.

Vegetable cultivation on backfilled areaWith maturity of soil overlying the spoil at backfill, it was surmised that it should be grown desert

cucurbits / vegetables.


6-10WAPCOS Limited

Following species were selected.


Seeds of above three species were broadcasted during monsoon months in inter-row spaces

and some were dibbled in the main pit where tree / shrub roots have gone deeper making

surface moisture available for vegetable growth.

Two months after rains, in September 2003 end, the entire area was fall of twines of these

plants showing huge fruiting. A total of 1885 twines of Kachra, Matira and Tindsi were counted.

Even with ½ kg fruit yield per twine, the total yield was nearly 94 kg of desert vegetable per ha.

This proved the success of rehabilitation, which also ameliorated the land surface. Similar

reclamation measures shall be implemented in the proposed phase of mine as well.

Reclamation of Top soil Disposal AreasDuring first five years of mine operation, about 75.9 lac m3 of top soil would be generated. The

same shall be disposed over an area of 12.0 ha. The cost for pasture development is

Rs.30,000/ha. The total cost works out Rs.3.6 lacs. The top soil stockpiles, of low height (< 6

m.) would be appropriately grassed to preserve the soil fertility. The grass will serve as an

excellent binder and would control soil erosion from the top soil stack pile, till it is reused as a

cover material at overburden disposal sites. These include its use for growing plants along the

fringes of the site, roads and reclamation of backfilled and external dump areas.

The species recommended for afforestation works are given as below:

Khejri Neem Ber Siris Rohera Kumtia

Cost for reclamationThe total cost for reclamation is Rs.1237.68 lakh. The details are given in Table-6.5. The

Environmental Management Plan is shown in Figure-6.1.


6-11WAPCOS Limited

Table-6.5: Cost required for reclamation worksItem Cost (Rs. lakh)Stabilization of overburden disposal sites 133.31Reclamation of mined out areas 1100.77Stabilization of top soil stack piles 3.60Total 1237.68

6.6 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENTThree rows of trees can be planted along the lease boundary of the mines and along various

roads. In the first row the spacing between the trees could be 20 m which could reduce to 15 m

in the second row. The species to be planted are given as below:

Khejri Neem Ber Siris Rohera Kumtia

As one of the important components of EMP, greenbelt development around and within the

proposed mine area site shall be undertaken to fulfill the following objectives:

mitigation of fugitive emissions; noise control; wastewater eco-environment; aesthetics, and optimum use of wasteland and environmental conservation.

The greenbelt development plan has also been delineated during the operational phase of mine,

to reduce the pollution levels to the maximum possible extent. About 75,000 plants over an area

of 75 ha is proposed in future. . The expenditure shall be Rs.100,000/ha. Thus, an amount of

Rs.75.0 lakh can be earmarked for this purpose. The details are given in Table-6.6.

Table-6.6: Details of afforestation during mine lifeYear No. of plants Area (ha)Up to 5th Year 10000 106th to 10th Year 10000 1011th to 15th Year 10000 1016th to 20th Year 10000 1021th to 25th Year 10000 1026th to 30th Year 10000 1031th to 35th Year 10000 10Total 70,000 70

In addition to 70.0 ha , 5.0 ha. area plantation area near office, canteen, etc. by planting 5000

nos. of plant.


6-12WAPCOS Limited

6.7 CONSERVATION PLAN FOR FLORAL SPECIESThe strip mining would remove species growing in the core zone. It is therefore, important to

preserve unaffected land masses in the core zone to preserve seed bank in the soil. This will

ensure in situ conservation for endangered species of Tecoma undulata (locally known as

Rohida) in the buffer zone of project area. However, special habitats have to land marked for

this purpose wherever possible in the buffer zone.

Predominant wind direction from May to September (most windy period) is from south west

direction. And therefore, the south-west location in the Buffer zone will be least affected by

windblown Suspended Particulate Matters from mining operation, power plant etc. Therefore,

the least affected area (Buffer zone) shall be used for conservation of flora and fauna. The

conservation site shall be >500m apart both from mining site and power plant which shall have

a thick green belt to minimize pollution at the proposed conservation site.

About five hectare area will be used for conservation of endangered (Tecoma undulata) and

other associated plant species with plantation density of 300- 400 sapling/ha.

Steps for conservation of endangered/threatened flora Nursery Preparation

It is recommended that a nursery with shade nets, proper irrigation sprinklers and sapling

storage system be set up in 0.5 ha area prior to commencement of mining. The

saplings/cuttings of threatened and endangered species may be raised from seeds/shoots

growing naturally in the core and buffer zones. After one year of hardening, they shall be

planted at the designated site. These species may also be planted at the reclaimed site.

It is also recommended that native trees (Prosopis cineraria, Salvadora oleoides, Acacia

nilotica, Acacia Senegal and Tecomella undulata) and shrubs (Capparis, Leptadaenia,

Crotalaria) will be planted in the reclaimed mine area. Saplings/cuttings of these species may

also be raised in the nursery. The density of trees and shrubs may range between 200 plants /

ha to a maximum of 400 plants /ha. These figures are based on the basis of natural density of

tall shrubs and trees that varies from 30 – 100 plants/ha on different habitats in core and buffer

zones.

The expertise and infrastructural facilities of the State Forest Department who have mastered

the art of raising endangered and threatened species in their high tech nurseries at a very

reasonable cost to promote afforestation and biodiversity conservation in the state shall be

utilized. The saplings/cuttings of native trees and shrubs are also easily available with them.


6-13WAPCOS Limited

Time of PlantationRainy season is most appropriate for sowing seeds of grasses and planting saplings raised in

the nursery/purchased from the State Forest Department. Hence pre-plantation preparation

shall begin in March- April. After fencing, pits shall be dug and filled in with potting mixture prior

to rains. It is recommended to use sandy alluvial soil excavated during mining in core zone in

preparation of potting mixture to ensure good rooting medium in the gravelly habitats.

Immediately after first shower, saplings/cutting of endangered and threatened species shall be

planted in the pits along with native species of trees and shrubs. The recommended plant to

plant distance is about 4-5 m while row to row distance is 9-10m. Natural succession of desired

grass species is a very slow process in arid regions. The suitable option is reseeding of space

between tree /shrub rows with pre-soaked seeds of Lasiurus sindicus, Cenchrus setigerus, C.

cilliaris, Panicum antidotale and Dichanthium annulatum in paired rows on raised bunds and

pasture legumes in the furrows. Eleusine compressa is the most appropriate species in gravelly

habitats of conservation site. Thus, overall aspection of vegetation at the reclaimed site would

be almost similar to a natural site within 10-15 years.

Fencing and MaintenanceThe protection of conservation sites is essential from stray animals as well as humans, in order

to allow saplings/cuttings to grow without any disturbances. The weeds should be removed

periodically from the pits. Regular watering at fortnight intervals is essential during first three

months of plantation followed by monthly interval for four years to ensure good growth and

rooting that enable plants to become independent.

Schedule Activities Raising of saplings/cuttings in the nursery one year in advance of plantation schedule.

Contacting with high tech nurseries of the State Forest Department for supply of

saplings/cuttings, as an alternate source.

Digging of pits and their filling with pot mixture (mixture of sandy alluvial soil and

compost) in April-June.

Fencing of sites

Plantation of one year old saplings after first shower

Sowing of other associated plants including grasses in the rainy season

Regular watering at fortnight intervals in the first three months followed at monthly

intervals for three years.

Deweeding and soil loosening (by hoe) of pits, every year for three years.


6-14WAPCOS Limited

Pruning of lowermost branches of trees to grow them straight.

The proposed plan for the formation, development and upkeep of the area which includes

demarcation and layout dividing the area in sub-plots and their semi permanent demarcation in

field and preparation of map and layout of excavation of pits where necessary, fencing,

construction of permanent boundary gate, construction of water tank and guzzler and one meter

wide paths/tracks in the area, construction of jhopa, plantation of various floral species including

thor, labour for day to day maintenance and provision for watering of plants shall be done.

The estimated cost for conservation of endangered flora will be around Rs. 1.67 lakhs/yr. The

total cost for seven years including 10% escalation per year shall be Rs. 16.0 Lakhs. The details

are given in Table-6.7

Table-6.7 : Budgetary Provision for Conservation Plan for floral speciesS.N. Activity Budget

(Rs. lakh/yr.)1 Purchase of tools and equipments 0.152 Weeding during rain 0.103 Replanting new trees and grass in place of dead ones 0.104 Labor salary appointed for maintenance (one person) 0.725 Expert visit to the site twice a year 0.206 Watering for plants 0.057 Fencing of planted area 0.158 Miscellaneous expenditure 0.20

Cost for one year 1.67Cost for 7 years (including 10% escalation/yr) 15.84 lakh say 16.0 lakh

6.8 CONSERVATION PLAN FOR FAUNAL SPECIES21 mammalian species reported from the area are widely or sparsely distributed not only in the

study area, but also throughout their distributional range including district Barmer. However, the

complete assessment of the impact of the lignite mining on the Chinkara, Desert Fox, Spiny

Tailed Lizard and Monitor Lizards is an important aspect for formulating the strategies of

conservation through various measures listed in the following paragraphs:

Rehabilitation of the existing populations of above species, if any, from the proposed

lignite mining lease areas to the suitable adjoining or surrounding habitats preferably

under the supervision of experts.

For rehabilitation of Desert Monitor and Desert Fox, if any, just before the

commencement of digging-operation in a particular mining-patch, a thorough search for

all the active dens of these species is recommended, particularly for young ones.


6-15WAPCOS Limited

Since, it is proposed to transport the lignite from mining-pit to the power plant with help

of a conveyer-belt at the ground level, it is suggested that the belt should be laid high

enough, at sufficient number of places, to provide gates for free movements of wild

animals resulting in continuity of the fragmented patches created by mining activities.

Restoring of destroyed habitat is recommended immediately after completion of the

mining process.

Measures for Avi-fauna

As such there is no water body in the core area hence no direct impact of mining on the

wetland and its birds. However, there are few water bodies in the buffer zone as well as on

the periphery of the study area therefore, from the bird's point of view; the following

measures have been recommended:

As water bodies in the Buffer Zone attracts many migratory species of birds from the

northern latitudes where they breed, predominated by the members of duck family (both

in diversity as well as in numbers). The proposed mining activities may affect the

continuous arrival of these migratory birds. Therefore, all the ponds (water bodies)

available in the project area should not only be maintained throughout the year, but also

may be improved. This will not only help the sustenance and survival of water birds, but

also will help in arresting the decreasing trend of several water bird species along with a

variety of aquatic biodiversity.

For terrestrial birds, the efforts should be directed in restoring the existing native

vegetation of the project area simultaneously, once the mining process is over for the

purpose.

Safeguards during MiningDuring mining phase, following measures have been suggested:

Strict restrictions shall be imposed on the workers at mining to ensure that they

do not harvest any species/produce from the nearby vegetation cause any

danger or harm to the animals and birds in the area.

The interference of human population would be kept to a minimum in the

adjacent vegetation and it would be ensured that no settlements are set-up in the

vicinity of tree cover or area with vegetation.


6-16WAPCOS Limited

Only well maintained/new equipment that produces lesser noise would be

installed at the mining sites.

The best way to control the noise is at source. Certain equipment that needs to

be placed permanently at one place like generators, etc. would be housed in

enclosed structures to cut off the noise.

Traffic (trucks, etc.) used by the project works will be managed to produce a

smooth flow instead of a noise producing stop and start flow.

Necessary training/orientation will be provided to the traffic operators/drivers.

Sounding of loud horns, etc. should be banned.

Project authorities will use water sprinklers on the road to avoid the dust from

construction activities.

Improvement of HabitatsVarious measures recommended for improvement of habitats are:

Fodder and wild fruit plantation for wild animals and for roosting, breeding and hiding

cover for migratory birds etc.

Annual bird count of birds by involving locals and bird experts

Removal of weeds and rehabilitation with local fruit bearing species in the area.

Education and awareness programmes for labour, mine staff and locals. An amount of

Rs.50.0 lakh has been earmarked for this purpose. The details are given in Table-6.8.

Table-6.8:Cost of habitat improvement for Improvement of Habitats of faunal speciesS. No. Items of Expenditure Amount (Rs. lakh)1. Fodder and wild fruit plantation for wild animals and for

roosting, breeding and hiding cover for birds etc.20.0

2. Annual bird count of by involving locals and bird experts. 10.03. Removal of weeds and rehabilitation with local fruit bearing

species in gaps.15.0

4 Education and awareness programmes for labour, mine staffand locals

5.0

Total 50.0

6.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENTAs a part of the expansion of mine, no additional land is to be leased. Hence, no R&R Plan is

required. However, RSMML will help the state government agencies in implementing various

development programmes in the area for social upliftment and community development.

RSMML as a part of its policy takes up various aspects of socio-economic development of the


6-17WAPCOS Limited

villages adjacent to the mines being operated. In past too, RSMML has developed many

facilities in the village adjoining to the mine area leased. RSMML takes up activities including:

- Provision of drinking water.- Upgradation of educational facilities- Medical facilities- Operation of consumer cooperative stores including Fair Price Shops in the adjoining

villages.- Development of social forestry, pastures, etc.- Promotion of various welfare activities.

In the Giral lignite mine area too, RSMML will develop few of the above mentioned facilities, in

consultation with local panchayats and villagers. An amount of Rs.50 lakh can be earmarked for

this purpose.

In addition, locals will be employed in the Giral lignite mine. Indirect employment of 1200

persons is being provided as a result of lignite mining activity at Giral.


WAPCOS Limited 7-1

CHAPTER-7

MINE CLOSURE PLAN7.1 INTRODUCTIONThe Giral lignite mine will be a captive lignite block for meeting the lignite requirement of 1

million tonnes / annum for Power Generation in pit head TPP.

7.2 MINE DETAILSThe total area of the Giral ML 2655.70 ha falling in Barmer district covering three villages is

mostly in the form of Khatedari land and Government land.

Disturbed areaThe disturbed area will comprise excavated land, outside dump yards, area occupied by

infrastructure roads etc. as shown in Table-7.1.

Table-7.1: Comparison of proposed land use in approved mining plan and as per thismine closure plan

Particulars Area As perapproved

Mining planand EIA (ha)

Area As nowadopted by Min

Mec (ha)

Remark

Excavation area 883 1100.77 The vertical area (883 ha)above the quarry bottomboundary was erroneouslywritten in place of excavationarea within the surface quarryboundary (1100.77 Ha) in theApproved Mining plan.

Top soil dump area 12 12surface dump area 157.28 133.31Infrastructure 3.51 3.5Green belt 75 75ETP 85.412 1 ETP cannot be 85 Ha and not

shown in Mining Plan henceadopted 1 ha by RQP(B.D.Sharma) in this MineClosure plan

TPP 1439.498 125 Actual measurement of TPPshows 125 Ha

Others indirectlyaffected area

0 1205.12

Total 2655.70 2655.7

Stagewise area excavatedThe anticipated land use at the end of every 5 years interval of mining operations is

tabulated in Table-7.2.


WAPCOS Limited 7-2

Table-7.2: Year / stage wise area excavated as per mine closure planYear Calendar Year Area excavated (ha)




Out of total excavated area 1100.77 ha at end of mine, 888.12 ha will be backfilled while the

rest 212.57 ha will remain in the form of a void. In 30th year 6.34 Mcum(L) will be rehandled

from the surface dump to the void area, on 35th year 21.41 Mcum(L) OB will be rehandled to

the void from the surface dump and at the end of mine the remaining 3.24 Mcum(L) from the

surface dump will be rehandled to the void.

The backfilled area will be having varying levels, areas and land usage as shown in the

Table-7.3.

Table-7.3: Details of height of crown dump above ground level at the end ofmining/post mine closure stage

S. No. Height of crownabove Ground

level (m)

Crown dump areaat ground level

Landusage Landusearea (ha)

1 GL 327.50 Agriculture 847.582 15 520.08 Agriculture3 25 13.82 Plantation/Forest 40.544 60 26.72 Plantation/Forest5 Void 212.57

Total 1100.77

Dump rehandling detailsThe details of rehandling of the surface dump during mining tenure are given in Table-7.4.


WAPCOS Limited 7-3

Table-7.4: Dump Rehandling DetailsYear OB rehandled

from Surfacedump (Mcum)

Name of Voidarea backfilled

Total volumebackfilled afterrehandling fromSurface dump,

mcum

DumpVolume(Mcum)L

Remark

Prog Cum29 2.04 2.0430 4.3 6.3431 4.3 10.64 V1G

(West of GiralPit)

10.64

32 4.3 14.94 033 4.3 19.24 034 4.25 23.49 VJ

(Jalilo Void)12.85 23.49 Combined volume

of surface dump ofGiral and Jalilo

35 4.26 27.75 V2G(middle Giral

Pit)

4.26

36 3.24 30.99 V3G(East Giral Pit)

3.24 7.5 Volume of surfacedump of Thumbli

Total 30.99

Void backfilling detailsThe details of backfilling of the voids during mining tenure and post mine closure are given in

Table-7.5.

Table-7.5: Void backfilling details (volumes and areas)Void

name*Volume (Mm3) Area (ha) Height (m)

Voidcapacit

y

Voidbackfilled

Balance void

Initial voidarea atend ofmining

Area of voidreduced due tobackfilling byrehandling ofsurface dump

during post mining

Post mineClosure

Void area

Post mineClosure

VoidHeight

VJ 48.36 12.85 35.51 102.27 0 102.27 44V1G 10.64 10.64 0 27.18 27.18 0 0V2G 4.26 4.26 0 12.45 12.45 0 0V3G 16.69 3.24 13.45 37.12 0 37.12 46VT 33.5 0 33.5 73.18 0 73.18 80

Total 113.45 30.99 82.46 252.2 39.63 212.57

Mined area reclamationThe lessee will have to take necessary steps to keep the area under disturbance at any

stage of mining operation to a minimum. This can be achieved by carrying out the

reclamation programme simultaneously with excavation. The gap can be reduced between


WAPCOS Limited 7-4

degradation and the reclamation by this programme. As mining has progressed the mined

out area was available for backfilling and it has been implemented. The reclamation details

are given in Table-7.6.

Table-7.6: Past backfilling details (volumes and areas)Year Area back

filled (in ha)Quantity of

OB/IB in Mm3Backfill

Plantation (ha)Remark

1994-1998 0.00 0.00 0.001998-1999 4.0 2.0 38.05 As per

ApprovedMining plan(Nov 2004version0

1999-2000 6.0 2.532000-2001 4.0 1.232001-2002 4.2 1.882002-2003 10.0 4.732003-2004 11.8 6.42004-05 to2013-2014

106.15 78.13 47.46 As per actualproduction

Total 146.15 97.08 85.52

Stagewise and sub-blockwise proposed reclamationThe Stagewise and sub-blockwise proposed reclamation is given below in Table-7.7.

Table-7.7: Year wise reclamation in Giral block as per this mine closure planPeriod Area proposed for reclamation in ha.(Progressive)

Calendaryear

Giral Jalilo Thumbli Surface dump areareclaimed afterrehandling on

ground level foragriculture

Since Inceptiontill 2003-04

1995-96 to2003-04

38.05 0.00

10th 2004-05 to2013-14

97.46 0.00

15th 2014-15 to2018-19

90.66 69.97 0.00

20th 2019-20 to2023-24

19.15 1.50 35.58

25th 2024-25 to2028-29

2.60 7.16 20.13

30th 2029-30 to2033-34

51.02 135.19 2.72 26.01

35th 2034-35 to2038-39

150.93 118.98 17.99 84.75

37th 2040-2041 0 0 78.76 22.55Total 449.87 332.8 155.18 133.31

Grand Total 1071.06


WAPCOS Limited 7-5

Post reclamation land useThe first in a successful reclamation programme is to decide that post reclamation land use.

It is proposed to cover all reclaimed area with plantation programme and bring the land use

as near to the original as possible in the Approved Mining Plan.

Whole of the area is proposed to be developed into a picnic spot due to the formation of

water body created as a result of left out void as well as creation of lush greenery over

adjoining backfilled area The water body will be used for irrigation, watering the forest at

earlier stages and it will also attract fauna.

As per the approved Mining Plan, It is proposed to cover all reclaimed area with plantation

programme. However, in case permission for felling of trees/ plantation is given from

appropriate authority, the area can be converted into agriculture use after post mine closure

stage. Accordingly, agriculture use in post mine closure stage has been proposed in this

Mine Closure Plan.

The details of the proposed land use at the end of mining (37th year) and after post mine

closure stage (40th year) are given in Tables-7.8 and 7.9 respectively.

Table-7.8:Details of landuse at the end of mining (on the day when last tonne of ligniteis extracted, 37th year) (Unit: ha)

Particulars Plantation Backfill orsurfacedump

unplanted

Companyuse

Undisturbed Area

Void Total

Excavation area 857.55 30.57 0 0 212.57 1100.77Top soil dump area 9.5 2.5 0 0 0 12surface dump area 133.31 0 0 0 0 133.31Infrastructure 0 0 3.51 0 0 3.51Green belt 75 0 0 0 0 75ETP 0 0 1 0 0 1TPP 0 0 125 0 0 125Others indirectlyaffected area

0 0 0 1205.12 0 1205.12

Total 1075.36 33.07 129.51 1205.12 212.57 2655.7


WAPCOS Limited 7-6

Table-7.9: Post mining land use with environment managementS.

No.Description of

areaLand use (ha.)

Publicuse

Plantation/forest

Agriculture Void/Waterbody

Companyuse

Others Total

1. External dump 0 0 133.31 0 0 0 133.312. Excavation 0 40.54 847.58 212.57 0 0 1100.773. Infrastructure 2.99 0.52 0 0 0 0 3.514. Power plant 0 0 125 0 0 0 1255. Storage of top soil 0 0 12 0 0 0 126. Green Belt 0 75 0 0 0 0 757. Effluent treatment

plant0 0 1 0 0 0 1

8. Others 0 0 0 0 1205.12 1205.12Total 116.06 1118.9 212.57 0 1205.12 2655.7

The Post Mine Closure Plan Map is enclosed as Figure-7.1

7.3 WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

The existing water resources both surface and groundwater within the study area have been

studied.

a) Surface waterThere is no surface water body in the area except for two small ponds near village Jalilo and

Giral. These are filled with rain water and later on used, mainly, for cattles. There is no

surface drainage in the area and the ground water being below the mining depth of lignite.

No drainage to the water regime in the area is anticipated due to mining.

b) Ground waterThe ground water is deep in the area, 90 m to 110m below the ground surface. The water is

saline as indicated by the abandoned well of Akli. Since the depth of mining would not

intersect the ground water table there no impact of mining on the ground water conditions in

the area.

Water pollution control measuresa) Effluent from mine and storm waterWash off from the oil/grease handling area of workshop are treated to remove oil & grease

using oil trap. Waste oil / grease are stored in leak proof containers and sold to authorized

vendors.

The sewage waste is treated in properly designed septic tanks and soak pits. All stacking

and loading areas are provided with proper garland drains equipped with baffles to prevent

wash offs from reaching the downstream natural channels.


WAPCOS Limited 7-7

The rainfall in the area is scantly and problem due to storm water is minimum. Peripheral

bunds will be erected on the outer edge of the abandoned benches before reclamation so

that the soil is not carried away by storm water.

7.4 AIR QUALITYAir and dust pollution control measuresThe SPM, CO, SO2 and NOx concentrations are within limits as already discussed earlier.

The mining operations and related activities are anticipated to increase the levels of SPM

and gaseous pollutants to a limited extent. The control measures to be adopted in mine

operation for suppression of fugitive dust at different sites are as follows:

a) Dust suppression systems (like water spraying) is adopted at:

- Faces while loading

- Dust suppression system (like water spraying) at roads used for transportation.

Sprinklers (Whirling) installed along the roads to suppress the dust.

- Transport vehicles is maintained leak proof

- Transfer points of lignite are provided with appropriate hoods/chutes to prevent

fugitive dust emission.

- Use of sharp teeth of shovels to prevent entrainment of dust.

- Suppression of dust fumes generated at the time of shattering and disintegration in

strata by watering.

- Greenbelt development at various locations including overburden disposal area, mine

pits, haulage roads etc.

b) Preventing dispersal of air borne dust:

- To prevent air pollution due to airborne dust, dense tree belts are planted around the

mine and sites housing crushing and loading facilities and dust masks are provided

as safety measure to the workers, engaged at dust generation points like drills (rarely

to be utilized), loading / unloading points, crushers /feeder breakers etc.

- The concentration of CO in the ambient air is negligible and is far below the

prescribed limit of CPCB and is not anticipated to exceed it in future. The mine

ambient air quality will be regularly tested to detect the presence of any pollutants

above prescribed limits and appropriate measures are adopted.


WAPCOS Limited 7-8

7.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT

The overburden strata is soft and clayed in nature. Doesn’t require any blasting, can be

directly dug and loaded into dumper by hydraulic excavator of adequate capacity as

proposed in extent of mechanisation. Topsoil of the area mostly consists of blown sand and

which has hardly any use in agriculture, the other strata of overburden are clays of different

varieties black and white in colour.

The excavated overburden shall be stacked at proposed waste dumpsite, which is at

minimum lead of 1 to 1.5 km from bottom most RL of the pit. The Overburden is dumped 15-

20 m ahead of the dump edge. The dumped overburden before edge of waste dump is

pushed down the edge by adequate size of dozer as proposed which eliminates requirement

of extra manpower as authorised spotters at dump and make dump as an accident free area.

At dump, always one-way traffic of dump truck is practiced by providing fix routes to all

direction from top edge of ramp at dump.

The haul roads and ramps are regularly graded by road grader as, mine haul road bears 20-

25% of the total production cost, all haul roads including main ramps are maintained by road

graders giving proper camber to easy draining out of rain water.

A garland drain is made all around the mine and waste dump to collect surface runoff water,

taking to a common storage pond which is utilised for water sprinkling purpose on mine

roads.

The stagewise overburden generation is shown in Table-7.10.


WAPCOS Limited 7-9

Table-7.10: Overburden generation in mcum (bank)Year Calendar Year Excavation area

(ha)OB+TS Removal

(Mm3) Topsoil generated FromExcavation (Mm3)

Pure OB from Excavation,(Mm3)

Progressive Cumulative Progressive Cumulative Progressive Cumulative Progressive Cumulative

Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 65.73 65.73 26.69 26.69 0.39 0.39 26.30 26.30

10th 2004-05 to 2013-14 221.08 286.81 79.88 106.57 1.327 1.72 78.55 104.85

15th 2014-15 to 2018-19 238.19 525.00 69.52 176.09 1.429 3.15 68.09 172.94

20th 2019-20 to 2023-24 174.98 699.98 71.34 247.43 1.050 4.20 70.29 243.23

25th 2024-25 to 2028-29 178.77 878.75 71.34 318.76 1.073 5.27 70.27 313.49

30th 2029-30 to 2033-34 104.17 982.92 71.34 390.10 0.625 5.90 70.71 384.21

35th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 98.95 1081.87 69.68 459.78 0.594 6.49 69.08 453.29

37th** 2040-2041 18.90 1100.77 13.73 473.51 0.113 6.60 13.61 466.91

Total 1100.77 473.51 6.605 466.91



WAPCOS Limited 7-10

OB dump details of Giral blockThe dumpwise details of OB volume, area and height area given in Table-7.11.

Table-7.11 Overburden dump details of giral block as per Mine Closure PlanS. No. Waste dump Volume (Mcum)

LooseArea (ha) Height (m)

1. Giral 12 50 302. Jalilo 11.49 47.84 303. Thumbli 7.50 35.47 30

Total 30.99 133.31

Proposed dump (outside) for Jalilo and ThumbliThe height and spread of proposed dump of Jalilo block and Thumbli block is as given

below. Mostly in initial years overburden removed is proposed to stack at outside dump and

in later years backfilling is proposed. The details are as given in Table-7.12.

Table-7.12: Stagewise overburden disposal as per mine closure planYear Calendar Year OB (B) Mcum Area (ha) OB disposed

to SurfaceDump (B)

Mcum

OBbackfilled(B) Mcum

Progg Cummu Progg ProggInception 1995-96 to 2003-04 27 35.48 7.94 18.36

10th 2004-05 to 2013-14 80 62.36 12.49 66.06

15th 2014-15 to 2018-19 70 35.47 6.52 61.57

20th 2019-20 to 2023-24 71 0 0 70.29

25th 2024-25 to 2028-29 71 0 0 70.27

30th 2029-30 to 2033-34 71 0 0 70.71

35th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 70 0 0 69.08

37th** 2040-2041 14 0 0 13.61


The total progressive waste disposal is given Table-7.13.


WAPCOS Limited 7-11

Table-7.13: Total progressive waste disposal (Unit: Mm3)Year Calendar Year Excavation

AreaBackfilling

OB,Dump

OBRehandleOB DumpMil. CUM

RehandleCrownDump

Mil. Cum

TopSoiluse

TotalOB & T

soil

Inception 1995-96 to 2003-04 65.73 18.36 7.94 0 0 0.33 26.62

10th 2004-05 to 2013-14 221.08 66.06 12.49 0 0 0.69 79.24

15th 2014-15 to 2018-19 238.19 61.57 6.52 0 0 0.93 69.01

20th 2019-20 to 2023-24 174.98 70.29 0 0 0 0.13 70.42

25th 2024-25 to 2028-29 178.77 70.27 0 0 0 0.19 70.45

30th 2029-30 to 2033-34 104.17 70.71 0 5.51 0 1.34 77.57

35th* 2034-35 to 2038-39 98.95 69.08 0 18.62 0 2.33 90.03

37th** 2040-2041 18.9 13.61 0 2.82 0 0.63 17.06

PostMine

Closure

0 0 0 0 0 0.05 0.07

Total 1100.77 439.96 26.95 26.95 0 6.61 500.46* 34th year end of Giral Pit, 31st year end of Jalilo Pit** 37th year end of Thumbli Pit

7.6 TOP SOIL MANAGEMENTThe soil is brown to pale brown in colour moderately coarse in texture with a shallow depth.

It is susceptible to moderate to severe erosion. It is occasionally suited for agriculture.

The soil in the project is more of less sandy in texture, covered with loose sand, hummocks

and sand dunes. The soils are brown to pale brown in colour, fine sand to loamy fine sand in

texture. Due to scarcity of rains, the vegetate cover on the surface and organic matter in the

soils is liable to wind erosion.

Before excavating the 1st OB bench 1.0m top soil will be scrapped separately and stacked in

low height (<5 m) near each block respectively over an area of 12 ha. It will be used for

laying over dumps and backfills before afforestation. Total volume of top soil generated will

be 25-30 lakh m3 and during the 1st five years of the mine it will be 5 lakh m3, which will be

covered with leguminous species for preserving soil nutrients and biomes The process of

laying top soil over final dump stage will continue all through mining and management of

dumping areas before undertaking afforestation. Technical reclamation will be done with the

help of machines like dozers and levelling the waste disposal area scientifically before laying


WAPCOS Limited 7-12

the top soil. The idea is to bring as much land available for afforestation and near to original

and improved stage as the mine comes to the closure stage.

Afforestation (Plantation during mining)A plantation program over life of the mine has been planned in a phase wise manner. Due

precaution has been emphasised in green belt development as per the importance of the

place. 7.5 m and above wide green belt has been proposed all around the ML. and green

belt on either side of roads to be 6-8 m wide with a distance of 2 m between successive rows

the trees can be planted in a staggering pattern to ensure maximum coverage reclamation /

plantation over the outside dump will be commenced from 4th year of mining.

However considering the degradation of the land due to mining a concerted effort would

have to be taken to create a green belt in the mining area. This green belt would have to be

located at the southern and south-western part of the lease area. At least 3 parallel rows of

green belts (shelter belt) each 20m. wide at intervals of 200 m. Should be created across the

direction of the wind. The first shelterbelt should be planted at a distance of at least 500 m.

from the south-western corner of the lease area. The belts should be preferably one km long

in the beginning. The intervening areas between the shelterbelts should be planted with

shrubs and grasses.

Thick green belt of Babool trees has been done along both sides of approach road between

Thermal Power plant and the mouth of Jalilo pit over 1 km stretch over which about 2000

no.of trees have been planted. In green belt along ML boundary line, about 3000 trees have

been planted.

The proposed afforestation is shown in Table-7.14.

Table-7.14: Proposed AfforestationMineStage

CalendarYear

BackfillingPlantationArea (ha.)

DumpPlantatio

n Area(ha.)

Greenbelt Area

(ha.)

SurfaceDump Area

Reclaimed atGround LevelAfter Dump

Removal(Agricultural

use) (ha)

Reclamation of

dismantled area

(ha)

Total(ha)

No of treesto be

planted@2500/ Ha

Progressive

Progressive

Progressive

Progressive

SinceInceptio

n

1995-96 to2003-04

38.05 0 38.05 95130.73

10th 2004-05 to2013-14

47.46 97.84 5.85 151.15 377883.77

15th 2014-15 to2018-19

112.79 35.47 20.94 169.20 422992.5


WAPCOS Limited 7-13

MineStage

CalendarYear

BackfillingPlantationArea (ha.)

DumpPlantatio

n Area(ha.)

Greenbelt Area

(ha.)

SurfaceDump Area

Reclaimed atGround LevelAfter Dump

Removal(Agricultural

use) (ha)

Reclamation of

dismantled area

(ha)

Total(ha)

No of treesto be

planted@2500/ Ha

Progressive

Progressive

Progressive

Progressive

20th 2019-20 to2023-24

20.65 0 18.04 38.69 96716.25

25th 2024-25 to2028-29

29.89 0 13.17 43.06 107641.5

30th 2029-30 to2033-34

188.94 -26.0106 11.1 26.01 200.04 500095.5

35th* 2034-35 to2038-39

287.90 -84.7494 4.4 84.75 292.30 730762

37th** 2040-41 131.87 -22.55 1.5 22.55 133.37 333427.75

PostMine

Closure

2040-41 to2043-44

30.57 *125.52 156.09 76425

Total 888.12 0 75 133.31 1221.95

2741075

* 125.52 HA = 125 TPP + 0.52 Mine Facilities

RSMML has got initiated a study through Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI) in

1998 to assess the rehabilitation of Lignite Mine Disturbed area in Giral mine. The key

objective of the study is survival of suitable species of grasses and woody perennials

efficacy of rehabilitation for amelioration of adverse environmental impact.

The Efficacy of rehabilitation was assessed in terms of

Natural regeneration Growing of crops Vegetables or rehabilitated surface

This is true of a recently vegetated system wherein rapid turnover of annual species takes

place. Finally, species of mid – or higher succession level appear indicating that the sub – or

climax species have finally taken hold. Site 4 and 5 planted in March, 2001 and July, 2001

has predominance of species of early to mid succession status. These could be grouped in

to two types. 1 transient type (appearing in first or second year and then disappear) and 2

consistent type (which appear in few number of consistently hold on in further years).

Examples of the first type are all the species of Eragrostis, Cenchrus biflorus, Corchrosus

tridense and Bracharia ramose. The consistent types included Eragrostis ciliaris,


WAPCOS Limited 7-14

Dactyloctenium ageyptium, Fagonia cretica convolvulus microphyllus which keep on

appearing in all the three year of sampling, indicating that these have been permanent hold

over these habitats.

Disappearance of transient successions paved the way of sub climax and climax level

species after 2-3 growing seasons. Hence such species are more in plantations of 1999 and

2000. These included cenchrus setigerus, C. Ciliaris, Chloris Virgata, Sehima nervosum,

Eleusine compressa, indigofera cordifolia and Zygophylium simplex.

Abundant occurrence of sub climax and climax species in 2-3 years old plots and those of

mid succession species in 1-2 year old plots clearly proved that the rehabilitation has

effectively started the process of natural regeneration leading slowly to climax vegetation

formation characteristic of this area.

Cultivation of pearl millet and cluster bean in the backfill area.

Successful raising of trees and growth of natural vegetation suggested that conditions have

become sufficiently mild and it may be possible to grow crops at backfilled site. An attempt

was made by CAZRI to grow cluster bean sand pearl millet on backfilled area between at

two sites (i) between the block of parkinsoina and (ii) between the block of Tamarix. Both the

crops were grown under the following treatments.

Control Urea 40 kg ha-1

2.5 ton farm yard. Manuree (FYM) ha-1

5.0 ton FYM ha -1

10.0 ton FYM ha -1

2.5 ton FYM ha -1 + 40 kg urea N ha -1

5 ton FYM ha -1 40 kg urea N ha -1

10 ton FYM ha -1 + 40 kg urea N ha -1

Crops were sown after rainfall both the crops germinated normally but survival and growth of

most of the cluster bean plants was poor. On the other hand pearl millet plants grew with

time. Better growth of pearl millet in comparison to cluster been may be attributed to its

higher salt tolerance. However, the growth was poor as well as patchy. One reason for this

could be low rainfall as only 140 mm rainfall was received in two events after sowing and as

the surface was not uniformly levelled, which could have affected the distribution of moisture.

The other reason could be high variation in soil EC which in Tamarix block ranged from 0.3

to 12.2 dSm-1. Stover yield after application of urea or manure was in general higher than

control but the differences between treatments did not follow specific trend which may be

attributed to variations in sol properties and moisture distribution.


WAPCOS Limited 7-15

Urea, ammonium sulphate, potassium nitrate and ammonium nitrate @ 60 kg N per ha were

applied. Stover yield was maximum in potassium nitrate treatment by ammonium nitrate,

ammonium sulphate and urea.

Nitrogen application is beneficial for Bijra growth. Potassium nitrate was best source of nitrogen closely followed by ammonium nitrate.

Vegetable cultivation on backfilled areaWith maturity of soil overlying the spoil at backfill, it was surmised that it should be grown

desert cucurbits / vegetables.

Following species were selected.


Seeds of above three species were broadcasted during monsoon months in inter-row

spaces and some were dibbled in the main pit where tree / shrub roots have gone deeper

making surface moisture available for vegetable growth.

Two months after rains, in September 2003 end, the entire area was fall of twines of these

plants showing huge fruiting. A total of 1885 twines of Kachra, Matira and Tindsi were

counted. Even with ½ kg fruit yield per twine, the total yield was nearly 94 kg of desert

vegetable per ha. This proved the success of rehabilitation, which also ameliorated the land

surface.

7.7 COAL BENEFICIATION AND MANAGEMENT OF COAL REJECTSAs already mentioned, no beneficiation is required hence no washery is proposed. Hence,

question of coal rejects for washery does not arise.

7.8 INFRASTRUCTUREA. Existingi. FacilitiesThe details of present infrastructure facilities are given Table-7.15.

Table-7.15: Details of Present Infrastructure1. Time office and First Aid Room 12. VT Centre 13. Mine office 14. Weigh bridge 25. Canteen 16. Water Tank (Potable Water) 1


WAPCOS Limited 7-16

7. Water O/H tank for dust suppression 18. Store 19. Laboratory 110. Rest shelter 111. Diesel Pump 212. Contractor’s Equipment Work shops 213. Residential camp accommodation for officers,

staff and workers of contractors2

14. Contractor’s stores 2

ii. CommunicationExisting mining area falls in the Giral village which is 43 km away from Barmer. Existing

mining area can be approached by motorable Pacca road and it is connected to metal road

of Bhadak- Thumbli road. National Highway no 15 is passing about 12 km away from the

area. Barmer railway station is the nearest railway station lying on Jodhpur – Munabao

section of NW railway.

iii. Transportation Manpower transport is carried out by Bolero and Bus. Lignite transport from mine to power plant is affected by mine dumpers. Lignite transport from mine to other industries (cement, brick Kilns, paper, textiles

etc) is affected by private trucks.

iv. Water supply for dust-suppression

The total water requirement is estimated as 190 m3/day. The details are given in Table-7.16.

Table-7.16: Details of Water Requirement in Giral Lignite MineS. No. Purpose Quantity (m3/ day)A. Potable water

1 Drinking water 5 lit / person per day for 1000 person 52 Colony 1500 person 100 lit / person par day 150

Total A 155B. Industrial water

1. Dust suppression/ plantation (B) 35Total (A+B) 190

Water supply for drinking and dust suppression is fulfilled from the water reservoir of Giral

TPS (within ML area) which, in turn, receives water through pipeline from Indira Gandhi

Nehar project (IGNP) located at a distance of 162 km at Mohangarh head (RD-1438),

Jaisalmer.


WAPCOS Limited 7-17

v. Equipment workshop and storesTwo Equipment Workshops and 2 stores have been established at site by the contractors

which take care of the routine maintenance of all the equipment engaged in mining and

related activities.

vi. Diesel storageDiesel storage has been provided in two diesel pumps which supplies diesel fuel to the

mining equipment.

vii. Residential colonyStaff and officers of RSMM commute from Barmer town to mine by Bus and Bolero. The

contractors have provided camp accommodation to their employees within the ML area.

vii. Power SupplyGiral mine is electrified and two transformers are situated at mine to step down 440 volt and

220 volt. Company is providing electricity facilities to Giral village. A separate transformer for

Giral and Jalilo pit has been installed for mine lighting and other works.

Portable telescoping electric lighting tower have been installed for illumination purpose in

mines, specially at dumps where supply of electricity cannot be provided. These towers are

provided with inbuilt DG Set of 5 KVA or supply can be taken from electric line of the mine.

B. ProposedAll facilities have been well developed and therefore there is no proposal for developing

more facilities in future until the company rethinks about further expansion.

7.9 DISPOSAL OF MINING MACHINERYMost of the machineries used for mining activity are being hired on contract basis hence the

machineries shall be carried by operating contractor from the mine after completion of

contract.

7.10 SAFETY AND SECURITYThe balance life of the OC mine operations is 27 years. During mining operations some of

the safety precautions being implemented are as under:

Erecting barbered wire fencing around the areas being excavated Erecting barbed wire fencing around the areas being dumped Erecting bunds / toe walls around the surface dumps to prevent damage to property

or injury to persons by rolling stones.

After finishing the mining operations, all areas will be converted either into agriculture use or

planted areas or the areas lying in between the above two land uses.


WAPCOS Limited 7-18

7.11 ECONOMIC REPERCUSSIONS OF CLOSURE OF MINEThe present manpower at site is as follows:

Table-7.17: Man Power InvolvementS. No. Particulars Proposed as per

approved mining planActual manpoweras on 31-03-2014

1 Executive 15 152 Office staff 27 143 Supervisors 47 174 Contractors employees 379 164

Total 468 210

Out of 164 contractor’s employees, 52 persons are unskilled and the remaining 112 are

skilled.

These 52 persons are local villagers while the rest are outsiders.

Manpower as available at the closure stage will be absorbed at alternative locations of the

company, if available. Those required to be relieved, will be compensated in line with the

applicable laws at that time. Gain from development activities in the region will be additional

opportunity for local people.

The soil of the acquired land is low in organic carbon and is not fertile. Land could be made

fertile by use of fertilisers under expert’s guidance and use of available water in the void

firstly for the land which remained undisturbed and also for the land which will partly be

recovered after dismantling infrastructures. Improved irrigation system like drip irrigation

need to be considered and implementing CAZRI recommendations.

7.12 TIME SCHEDULING FOR ABANDONMENTThe abandonment activities of the OC mine will start 5 years prior to the abandoning of the

mine i.e. from 25th year. Study Report of the existing status of the project and tasks required

for final abandonment will be identified along with their possible time frame for

implementation will be undertaken. Items among others could be as under:

i) Disposal of HEMM and other equipments (electrical/mechanical) of Giral eitherthrough transfer to other working projects, sale or disposal as scraps or takenback by the contractor in case it is on hire.

ii) Dismantling schedule of permanent and temporary structures excepting few whichmay have utility in the revised scheme for managing abandoned area.

iii) Winding up all H.T & L.T electrical lines, delivery pipe lines for sprinklers and othervaried uses other than those which may be required for development of theabandoned area.

iv) Identifying areas and spots in the developed forest and lagoon (water body)spread for undertaking beautifying works as picnic spots, boating and any other


WAPCOS Limited 7-19

spots to attract visitors and tourists and preparing required schemes forimplementation.

v) Scheme for undisturbed and recovered land development programme for makingthe land more fertile by use of fertilisers and other measures under expertsguidance to sustain affected population after abandonment of the mine.

vi) Related matter of land development is also developing irrigation system byfollowing drip irrigation system.

vii) Study Report on suitable Flora and Fauna sustenance on some changes in overallenvironment when finally abandonment takes place and schedule their gradualintroduction. Central Arid Zone Research Institute, an organisation of IndianCouncil of Agriculture Research under Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India wasengaged for preparation of soil and biotic restoration plan. A copy of the plan isenclosed.

viii) Any other matter related for gainful development.

The minute details will be worked out in the 26th year. The execution of abandonment

activities of the OC mines will be started about four years before the mines get abandoned.

One year time is assigned for study of items as indicated above in i to viii and for preparation

of detailed schemes and reports for implementation. Many of the required activities will be

carried out during last four years of the mine operation. Some abandonment activities will

have to be continued for about two to three years more after the mine operations get fully

closed by retaining only few temporary essential office / residential structures.

Some of the important activities which will be carried during the post closure period will be

part of the items under i, ii & iii and also on iv & v as indicated above on action identified in

working locations towards end. Details of expenditure on Progressive and Post Mine Closure

activities along with the time schedule bar chart and summarized is given in Table-7.18. The

post-mine & closure plan is given in Table-7.18. The facilities to be retained and dismantled

are given in Table-7.19.

Table-7.18: Summary of progressive and mine closure costActivities Total (Rs. Lakh)

Barbed wire fencing around the dump 124.34Barbed wire fencing around the pit 412.55Garland drain around dump 43.61Rehabilitation/ plantation 2189.32Toe wall around the dump 86.90Top soil management 3790.00Wire fencing with masonry pillars around the pit 650.12Dismentalling of facilities and road etc. 5.00Environmental monitoring (air, water soil etc.) 30.00Supervision / implementation 30.00Surface dump rehandling 9297.00


WAPCOS Limited 7-20

Activities Total (Rs. Lakh)Expenditure for leveling to make area fit for agriculture 15.29Grand Total 16674.12

Table-7.19: Facilities to be retained and dismantledS.

No.Particulars Retained

(Area in Ha.)Dismantle

(Area in Ha.)I Facilities to be retained

1 VTC, Canteen, Mine office, Water tank O/H tank,Shopping centre, Primary school, Communitycentre, Guest house, Dispensary etc.

0.198

2 Road 2.792II Facilities to be dismantled

Facilities including Time office, Store, Pit headbath, weigh bridge

0.52

Total 2.99

A perusal of Table-7.19 shows that the facilities will be retained over 2.99 ha area which can

be used for the community functions by the villagers. A corpus fund of Rs 20.00 lakh will be

deposited by the proponent, the interest of which can be used for the repairs and upkeep of

the retained facilities

7.13 ABANDONMENT COSTIn line with the Guidelines, it has been estimated by MOC that typically closure cost of an

OC mine will be about Rs. 6 lakh/ha and that for UG mining it will be Rs 1 lakh/ha. Due to

increase in cost index from 129.6 in August 2009, to 179.6 in December 2013. The present

closure cost will be Rs 8.315 lakh/ha for Opencast mines. The ML area is equal to the Block

area 2655.7 ha which will be related to OC operations as follows:

Total cost to be deposited in Escrow account in 27 years will be as follows:Particulars Area (Ha) Rate,

Rs. Lakhs/haAmount,

Rs. LakhsFor OC operations 2655.70 8.315 22081.65

The cost in the 1st year to be deposited = Rs. 22167.72/27 = Rs 817.84 lakhs.

The cost to be deposited in every subsequent year will be 5% higher than the cost of the

previous year and so on.

The annual escrow amount to be deposited is shown in Table-7.20.


WAPCOS Limited 7-21

Table-7.20: Annual escrow amount to be depositedYear from01-4-2014

Amount to be Deposited inEscrow Account

Year Amount to beDeposited in Escrow

Account(Rs. Lakh) (Rs. Lakh)

1 (2014-15) 817.84 19 1968.232 858.73 20 2066.643 901.67 21 2169.974 946.75 22 2278.475 994.09 23 2392.396 1043.79 24 2512.017 1095.98 25 2637.618 1150.78 26 2769.499 1208.32 27 2907.97

10 1268.74 2811 1332.17 2912 1398.78 3013 1468.72 3114 1542.16 3215 1619.27 3316 1700.23 3417 1785.24 3518 1874.50 Total 44710.55

Total amount to be deposited in Escrow account will be Rs 447.1 crore

7.14 FINANCIAL ASSURANCEi. For financial assurance, the mining company shall open an ESCROW account with

any schedule bank, with the Coal Controller Organisation (on behalf of the Central

Govt.) as exclusive beneficiary before the permission is given for opening the mine

by the Coal Controller. The mining company shall cause payments to be deposited

in such Escrow account at the rate computed as indicated in table given above. The

owner of the Company may select the Schedule Bank where the Escrow Account is

to be opened and inform the same to the Coal Controller, Kolkata. The Escrow

Account has to be opened as per the guidelines of the Mine Closure Plan. The

amount being deposited will be reviewed with such periodicity as deemed fit by the

Coal Controller.

ii. Upto 80% of the total deposited amount including interest accrued in the Escrow

account may be released after every 5 years in line with the periodic examination of

the Closure Plan as per Clause 3.1 of the Annexure of the Guidelines. The amount

released should be equal to expenditure incurred on progressive Mine Closure in


WAPCOS Limited 7-22

past 5 years or 80% whichever is less. The balance amount at the end of the Final

Mine Closure shall be released to the Mine Owner or/Lease holder on compliance of

all provisions of the Closure Plan duly signed by the Lessee to the effect that said

Closure of mine complied all statutory rules, regulations, orders made by the Central

or State Govt., statutory organisations, Courts etc. and duly certified by Coal

Controller.

iii. An agreement, outlining the detailed terms and conditions of operating the Escrow

account, shall be executed between the Mining company, Coal Controller and the

concerned bank in order to give effect to this. The agreement will be executed

before the grant of the permission by the Coal Controller to open the mine.

7.15 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MINE OWNERIt is the responsibility of the mine owner to ensure that the protective measures contained in

the Mine Closure Plan including reclamation and rehabilitation works have been carried out

in accordance with the approved mine Closure Plan and Final Mine Closure Plan.

The owner shall submit an yearly report to the Coal Controller before 1st July of every year

setting forth the extent of protective and rehabilitative works carried out as envisaged in the

approved mine closure plan (Progressive and Post mine Closure Plan).

7.16 PROVISION FOR MINE CLOSUREThe mine owner will be required to obtain a mine closure certificate from Coal Controller to

the effect that the protective, reclamation and rehabilitation works in accordance with the

approved mine closure plan/ Final mine Closure Plan have been carried out by the mine.

7.17 CSRThe following CSR activities have been undertaken by the Company:

i. The company provides free drinking water and electricity to Giral village.

ii. Company organises medical camps in nearby villages through its medical team

along with free medicines twice a week.

iii. Contribution to CM’s fund for creation of medical facilities at Barmer Hospitaliv. Contribution to CM’s fund during the floods in 2006v. Construction of roads, primary health centres, rest shelters, water tanks, funeral

grounds, bus stops in and around the nearby villages.

The CSR activities undertaken by the Company since 2005-06 upto 2011-12 are given

below in Table-7.21 alongwith the expenditure.


WAPCOS Limited 7-23

Table-7.21: Expenditure undertaken for CSR in the pastYears Amount,

Rs LakhsParticulars

2005-06 151.00 Flood relief & Social programme2006-07 7.91 Flood relief & Social programme2007-08 28.00 CM relief fund for medical facility at Barmer2009-10 0.20 Blind Seva Sangh, Ajmer2010-11 81.74 Construction of Road (Tar) connecting Bhadka – Akli

road to Jalela village2011-12 23.53 Construction of community centre, school, primary

health centre, shelter, pigeon platform, bus stand etc2012-13 31.66 Construction of community centre, school, primary

health centre, shelter, pigeon platform, electrificationof Giral village, bus stand etc

324.04Say 3.24 crore

Similarly, the CSR activities are planned in future also in consultation with local Panchayats.

7.18 LAND COMPENSATION AND R&R PACKAGE PAID TO PAFS1380.13 ha agriculture land has been acquired for mining purpose. Compensation of Rs

72.50 Crores has been paid to oustees for land as well as permanent structures till 31-03-

2014. NOC for 115 ha Govt land has been received.

RSMML EIA study for Girallignite mine, Bikaner

8-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER -8RISK ASSESSMENT AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.1 INTRODUCTIONMining and allied activities are associated with several potential hazards to both the employees

and the public at large. A worker in a mine should be able to work under conditions, which are

adequately safe and healthy. At the same time the environmental conditions should be such as

not to be impair his working efficiency. This is possible only when there is adequate safety in the

mine. Hence mine safety is one of the most essential aspects of any working mine. The safety

of the mine and the employees is taken care of by the Mines Act 1952, which has well defined

procedures for safety and regular monitoring and supervision by Director General of Mines

Safety.

8.2 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDSThere are various factors, which can create disaster in mine. These hazards are as follows:

Filling of the mine pit due to excessive rains. Slope failures at the mine faces Accident due to blasting Accident due to plying of heavy mining equipment Sabotage in magazine area

In order to take care of above hazards/disasters, the following will be strictly followed: Working of mines as per approved plans. All safety precautions and preventions of CMR, 1957 will be strictly followed

during all mining operations. Regular maintenance and testing of all mining equipment as per manufacturer’s

guidelines. Provision of adequate capacity pumps for pumping out water from the mining pit

with standby arrangements. Checking and regular maintenance of garland drainage and earthen bunds. Entry of unauthorized persons will be prohibited. Periodic checking of worthiness of fire fighting and first aid provision in the

mining area. Training and refresher courses for all the employees. Cleaning of mining faces regularly. As a part of disaster management plan, a rescue team will be formed by

imparting specialized training to the concerned mining staff.

Although, no disaster is envisaged in this mine, it is necessary to draw an action plan as a

contingency measure as explained in the following paragraphs.

8.3 INUNDATIONThe proposed mine is located in the arid district of Barmer in Rajsthan. The average rainfall in

the project area is 263 mm. On an average, there are 16 rainy days in a year. The water table


8-2WAPCOS Limited

will not be intercepted during mining operation. However rain water will accumulate in mine

sump during rainy season. The total mine sump water will need evacuation for smooth mining

operation. During the course of mining, the water will be pumped out from mine sump and will

be stored in a surface reservoir within the ML area. The reservoir capacity will depend on the

quantity of sump water to be pumped out. However, adequate capacity sump has been provided

within the mine to prevent lignite mining benches.

Garland drains are proposed for all the pits to prevent in rush of water during rains. Adequate

capacity pumping arrangements have to be made to deal with the mine seepage expected

especially beyond the depths more than 90 m. Also a D.G. set has been provided which can

become operative in case of power failure to mine pumps.

8.4 DISASTER DUE TO FAILURE OF PIT SLOPEIf the slope angle of the benches are more than the angle of repose or if there are any

geological disturbance which lead to failure of benches, which ultimately, endanger the man and

machinery.

8.5 DISASTER DUE TO FAILURE OF WASTE DUMPThere are two types of waste dumps, which are discussed below:

Surface dumpSliding of surface waste dump is an equally severe risk compared with quarry slope failure.

Hence, it is imperative that the degree of hazard against potential failure of waste dump slope

should be identified and that precautionary measures are adopted, if required.

Average slope angle of dump will be kept below 26° which is expected to be safe. The waste

dump will be stabilised by tree plantation and other arrangements as detailed below:

Drains will be made on the dump top to regulate uncontrolled descent of waterduring rainy season down the slope through specially made chutes to finallydischarge into garland drains.

Plantation along the periphery of dump top over a width of 1.5 m will be done.Small pits of 0.3 x 0.3 x 0.3 m will be cut on dump slopes and seedlings will beplanted to prevent erosion stabilise dump slopes.

A stone toe wall will be constructed all around the waste dump base to preventwaste dump material being carried out to the general drainage system of the area.

A garland drain will be constructed all around the waste dump area for smooth flowof water.

Dump slopes will be kept at < 260 considering the optimum bench height.

Backfill dumpThe backfill dump height will vary from 12 m to 15 m which will, though, be supported at the

sides by quarry batters but the main advancing front of the backfill dump towards dip side will be

amenable to slope failure. The dump will be planted as soon as ultimate height (surface level) is


8-3WAPCOS Limited

achieved. It is planned not to have overall gradient of the dump more than 26°. As the depth of

pit(s) or the heights of backfills are comparatively small, no failure of backfill dump is

anticipated.

8.6 EFFECT OF HAULAGE TRUCK OPERATION ON DUMP POINT STABILITYOperating mine haulage trucks near the crest of stockpiles and waste dumps is a potentially

hazardous practice often resulting in slope failure and dump point accident. The dump point

accident involves the fall of a haulage truck over the edge and down the front slope of the

stockpile or waste dump. The practice of end dumping over the crest of the pile places the

haulage truck near the edge of a marginally stable structure and leaves little room for operator

error.

It is evident that the complexity of the truck slope system cannot be adequately represented

through conventional slope stability analysis. Conventional two-dimensional methods are useful

in determining the overall stability of a slope under its own weight or by an externally applied

constant load. They are not, however, useful in modeling localized three-dimensional failures on

what would otherwise be considered a stable slope. A technique was required that would model

these local three-dimensional failures, and would also consider the dynamic forces generated

by operating haulage trucks. Utilizing the kinetic method of limit analysis, interaction between

haulage truck operation and slope stability are analyzed. The analysis is based on the following

fundamental assumptions:

The slope is stable under its own weight.

The material by which the slope is built is homogeneous, isotropic and dry or only

slightly wet.

The slope extends beyond the failure region induced by the haulage truck, with the

upper surface being horizontal.

The slope failure is induced by weight of the truck transmitted through the rear axle.

The slope has consistent slope angle from the base of the dump of the crest.

The method determines an admissible truck weight (upper bound value) for varying distances

from the slope edge. Input parameters are the material strength, slope geometry, and initial

forces induced by vehicle tracking. This method can be utilized to assist in determination of safe

operating distances for a haulage truck from slope edge, the development of vehicle operating

procedures, and the admissible weight for static concentrated loading near the crest of an

otherwise stable slope.

This analysis is helpful for understanding of the factors affecting the safe operation of haulage

trucks near the crest of slopes. It can also assist in determination of safe operating distance


8-4WAPCOS Limited

from a slope edge for a specific slope and truck combination. However, the results can be

accepted with caution. The calculation is based upon an upper bound approach of limit analysis.

Therefore, the actual truck limit weight will be slightly lower than indicated by the analysis.

Conversely, the critical distance of the truck from the slope crest (point at which a dump point

failure can be expected) is lower bound estimation, and will be slightly larger than indicated by

the analysis. The results generated by the program are more dependent on the accuracy of the

input values than the approximations assumed in the analysis. With well-estimated parameters,

a factor of safety of approximately 1.2 is suggested.

The measures to prevent accidents due to trucks and dumpers are listed as below:

All transportation within the main working should be carried out directly under the

supervision and control of the management.

Vehicles must be proposes maintained and checked thoroughly at least once a week

by the competent person authorized for the purpose by the Management.

Road signs should be provided at each and every turning point especially for night

driving.

To avoid danger while reversing the trackless vehicles especially at the embankment

and tapping points, all areas for reversing of lorries should as far as possible be

made clear of human movement.

A statutory provision of the fences, constant education, training, etc. will go a long

way in reducing the incidents of such accidents.

Haul trucks should be oriented essentially perpendicular to the bream, while

unloading.

Dumping of overburden or waste material by dumpers and dozers should follow

certain general precautions.

8.7 DISASTER DUE TO SURFACE FIRE/ STACK FIRESSufficient fire extinguishers will be installed at selected locations on surface like Electrical Sub-

stations, workshop, Garage, Diesel Depot, Stores etc. Besides, sufficient number of water

hydrants with sufficient hosepipes will be made available in the surface for fire protection. In

order to prevent fire hazards in stockpiles, the following precautions will be taken.

Prevent the happening or presence of any external source of fire in the vicinity of stockpiles i.e.

- Naked fire- Electric fire- Fuel oil fire


8-5WAPCOS Limited

In case of electric equipment operating in the vicinity of fuel oil being usedor stored in the

vicinity of the stockpiles, appropriate types of fire extinguishers will be provided on or near such

equipment to extinguish the fire quickly.

Restrict the long term stacking height of the lignite to below two meters. Higher height

may only be attempted for shorter interval of stacking.

The time and height will be established with respect to spontaneous combustion.

Appropriate arrangement will be made by inserting pipes in the stack to monitor the

internal temperature of lignite. In case, temperature is found to shoot above safe limits,

the lignite from the part of stack shall be immediately dug out and disposed safely.

In certain mines, the insitu lignite exposed in lignite bench catches fire due to

spontaneous heating, which has to be kept under vigil. Under such circumstances, the

affected area of lignite will be separately dug up and disposed of safely.

8.8 CARE AND MAINTENANCE DURING TEMPORARY DISCONTINUANCEThe following protective measures will be taken up to deal with the unforeseen circumstances

that may arise due to temporary discontinuance of the mine.

All heavy earth moving mining machinery from the mine will be withdrawn and

brought to the safe place so that these do not get buried due to bench collapse, if

any, and get damaged during the period of discontinuance.

The entries to pit will be fenced with Notice Boards at the fences prohibiting entry

into the pit by unauthorized persons.

The boundaries of the pit will be fenced of to prevent cattle entering the pit.

At the entrances and strategic points, sentries/watchmen will be posted to guard

the mine areas and explosive magazine. They will be provided with mobile

phones/ walky-talkies to contact the mine authorities / police for help during an

emergency.

The mine area will be kept illuminated during night time. Audible warning sirens

will be established at the mine office to be used during an emergency so that

prompt help can be received from proper sources.

Managerial, supervisory and competent persons of the mine would be engaged

for supervising machinery maintenance and housekeeping of the mine areas, as

per needs.


8-6WAPCOS Limited

8.9 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLANIn case a disaster takes place, despite preventive actions disaster management will have to be

done in line with the descriptions below. It is proposed to identify a dedicated group for dealing

with emergency situations and the coordination among key personnel. The Group will comprise

three teams, namely, Firefighting team, Rescue team and Support team as shown in Figure-8.1.

FIGURE-8.1: ORGANISATION FOR DEALING WITH EMERGENCY SITUATION

The Group will be headed by an emergency coordinator who will be the Mine Manager. In his

absence, a senior most person available at the mine will act as emergency coordinator.The

proposed composition of the teams is given in Table -8.1.

Table-8.1: Proposed Teams to Deal With Emergency SituationDesignation Qualification

A. Fire Fighting TeamLeader/Captain Mines managerMember ForemanMember Mining sirdarB. Rescue TeamLeader/Captain 1st Class Mines ManagerMember ForemanMember Mining sirdarC. Support TeamLeader/Captain 1st Class Mines ManagerMember 2nd Class Mines ManagerMember ForemanD. SecurityA competent agency will be appointed for the security of various areas related to miningoperations.

EMERGENCY COORDINATOR

MINES MANAGER

RESCUE TEAMFIRE FIGHTING TEAM SUPPORT TEAM


8-7WAPCOS Limited

Once the mine becomes operational, the above table along with names of personnel will be

prepared and made easily available to workers. A tele-communication network and wireless will

connect Site Emergency Control Room (SECR) to control various Departments of the mine, fire

station and neighbouring industrial units/mines.

8.10 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF EMERGENCY TEAM(a) Emergency Coordinator (EC)The emergency coordinator will assume absolute control of site and will be located at SECR.

(b) Incident Controller (IC)Incident controller will be a person who will go to the scene of emergency and supervise the

action plan to overcome or contain the emergency. Shift supervisor or Environmental Manager

will assume the charge of IC.

(c) Communication and Advisory TeamThe advisory and communication teams shall consist of heads of various Department.

(d) Roll Call CoordinatorA senior person from administration or personnel Department will be the Roll Call Coordinator.

The Roll Call coordinator will conduct the roll call and will evacuate the mine personnel from

assembly point. His prime function will be to account for all personnel on duty.

(e) Roll Call LeadersEC will appoint Roll Call leaders from maintenance/ store. The Roll Call leaders will carry out roll

call physically at roll call/evacuation point.

(f) Search and Rescue TeamThere will be a group of people trained and equipped to carryout rescue operation of trapped

personnel. The people trained in first aid and fire fighting will be included in search and rescue

team.

(g) Emergency Security ControllerAn Emergency Security Controller will be senior most security person located at main gate

office and coordinating with the outside agencies e.g. fire brigade, police, DM, civil/defence

representatives and media men etc.

(h) Shift Medical officerHe will be a doctor at the first aid centre/medical centre of mine.

(i) Personnel ManagerThe personnel manager on arrival at site will handle all media men, contact public and handle

the visits by political/statutory authorities.


8-8WAPCOS Limited

8.11 OUTSIDE ORGANISATIONS INVOLVED IN CONTROL OF DISASTERIn the event of massive spillage of fuel oil or occurrence of fire, population inside and outside

mine boundaries, vegetation and animal etc. may be affected. In such circumstances,

secondary fire may also take place. In such an event, help will be taken from outside agencies

also. The organizations that will be involved are as follows:

(a) State and local authorities: District Collector, Revenue Divisional Officer, etc(b) Chief Inspector of Explosives(c) Environmental agencies: Member Secretary of State Pollution Control Boards,

District Environmental Engineer(d) Fire Department: District Fire Officer(e) Police Department: District Superintendent of Police, SHOs of nearby Police

Stations(f) Public Health Department:

- District Medical Officer- Residential medical officers of PHCs in a radius of 5 km around mine site

(g) Local Community Resources- Regional Transport officer- Divisional Engineer Telephones

(h) Director General of Mine Safety

The outside organizations will directly interact with District Magistrate who in consultation with

EC will direct to interact with mine authorities to control the emergencies.

8.12 EMERGENCY CONTROL PROCEDUREThe onset of an emergency, will in all probability, commence with a major fire or explosion or

collapse of wall along excavation and will be detected by various safety devices and also by

members of operational staff on duty. If located by a staff member on duty, he (as per site

emergency procedure of which he is adequately briefed) will go to nearest alarm call point,

break glass and trigger off the alarms. He will also try his best to inform about location and

nature of accident to the emergency control room.

In accordance with work emergency procedure, the following key activities will immediately take

place to interpret and take control of emergency.

On site fire crew led by a fireman will arrive at the site of incident with fire foamtenders and necessary equipment.

Emergency security controller will commence his role from main gate office. Incident controller will rush to the site of emergency and with the help of rescue

team and will start handling the emergency. Site main controller will arrive at Site Emergency Control Room (SECR) with

members of his advisory and communication team and will assume absolutecontrol of the site. He will receive information continuously from incidentcontroller and give decisions and directions to:- Incident controller


8-9WAPCOS Limited

- Mine control rooms- Emergency security controller- Site or shift medical officer

After all key emergency personnel have taken up positions, the incident Controller will use

communication system to convey and receive the messages. At the site of incident, the incident

controller will directly handle the emergency with the help of specific support group and fire

fighting personnel etc. At the main gate Emergency Security Controller and Personnel Manager

will contact external agencies.

At the site medical centre/first aid centre medical officer will take control of medical support

services. Emergency Co-ordinator will be directing and deciding a wide range of desperate

issues. In particular, EC has to decide and direct

- Whether incident controller requires reinforcement of manpower and facilities?- Whether mine is to be shut down or more importantly kept running?- Whether staff in different locations is to remain indoor or to be evacuated and

assembled at designated collection centre?- Whether missing staff members are to be searched or rescued?- Whether off-site emergency plan to be activated and a message to that effect is

to be sent to district head quarter?- Whether staffs in different locations are to remain indoor or are to be evacuated

and assembled at designated collection centre?- Whether missing staff members have been searched or rescued?- Whether and when district emergency services are to be called?- Respond to any large size complaints from outside public and to assess an

off-site impact arising out of the on-site emergency?When the incident has eventually been brought under control as declared by the Incident

Controller, the EC will send two members of his advisory team as inspectors to incident site for:

- An assessment of total damage and prevailing conditions with particular attentionto possibility of re-escalation of emergency which might, for the time being, isunder control.

- Inspection of other parts of site, which might have been affected by impact ofincident

- Inspection of personnel collection and roll call centres to check if all persons onduty have been accounted for.

- Inspection of all control rooms of mine to assess and record the status ofrespective departments and any residual action deemed necessary.

Post Emergency, the inspectors will return to SECR with their observations and report on

findings and will submit the same to EC.

Based on these reports, EC will communicate further directives to all emergency management

sub-centres and will finally declare and communicate termination of emergency and authorise

step by step restoration of normal operation of the affected mine areas. The fire siren will be

sounded with all CLEAR – SIGNAL.


8-10WAPCOS Limited

In all other type of emergencies like land slide etc, similar action will be taken as in case of fire

and explosion explained above.

During entire period of emergency, the site will remain out of bounds to external visitors except

- District Fire Personnel- District hospital ambulance staff- Civil/ defence personnel- District administration- Factory inspectorate and Labour Commissioner- Officers of State Pollution Control Board- Insurance authorities- Directorate General of Mine Safety- Chief Inspector of Explosives

All the members of public, political parties, gram panchayat etc. will be dealt with from the main

gate office by the Emergency Security Controller and the Personnel Manager.

8.13 ALARM SYSTEM TO BE FOLLOWED DURING DISASTEROn receiving the message of disaster, from site Main Controller, fire station control room

attendant will sound SIREN I WAILING TYPE FOR 5 MINUTES. Incident controller will arrange

to broadcast disaster message through public address system.

On receiving the message of "Emergency Over" from Incident Controller the emergency control

room attendant will give "All Clear Signal”, by sounding alarm straight for two minutes.

The features of alarm system will be explained to one and all to avoid panic or

misunderstanding during disaster.

8.14 ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN ON HEARING THE WARNING SIGNALOn receiving the disaster message following actions will be taken

- All the members of Advisory Committee, Personnel Manager, Security Controller,etc. shall reach the SECR.

- The persons of various Departments of mine production will remain ready in theirrespective units for crash shutdown of mining activities on the instruction fromSECR.

- The persons from other sections will report to their respective officer.- The concerned section will take immediate action to remove contractor's

personnel outside the mine gate.- Residents of surrounding villages will remain alert


9-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-9ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

9.1 OBJECTIVESMonitoring is the gathering and evaluation of information for assessment of performance which

is assessed based on the success of strategies implemented vis-a-vis the environmental

objectives.

The specific objectives are:

- detection of short and long term trends;- recognition of environmental changes and analyse their causes;- improvement of the monitoring system, and- improvement in practices and procedures for environmental protection.

Monitoring becomes essential to ensure that the mitigation measures planned by way of

environmental protection function effectively during the entire period of mine operation. The

process helps in assessing the performance of the mine.

Moreover, changes external to the project area may at any future stage endanger environmental

conditions rendering the existing mitigation measures inadequate. Hence, it is necessary to

remain vigilant through a well planned and meticulously implemented environmental monitoring

programme.

9.2 AREAS OF CONCERNFrom the monitoring point of view the areas of concern are the land use, soil, dust, noise, plant

life, etc. The objective is to establish an "early warning" system of indicators to detect, if there is

a trend that pollution or environmental damage will exceed permitted levels. Such indicators can

be categorised under three groups: physical, chemical and biological, as applicable to each

mode of pollutant transmission. Suggested monitoring programme is outlined in the following

Sections of this Chapter.

9.3 WATERGroundwater quality monitoring can be done in various villages in the study area. About 4 wells

each in villages Neembala, Aakli, Kotra, Thumbli, Jalilo, Giral can be monitored. The

parameters to be monitored are conductivity, pH, alkalinity and acidity, BOD, COD, Chlorides,

Sulphates, Nitrates, Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium, Potassium, Phosphates, Fluorides and Total

Dissolved Solids (TDS).

The monitoring should be done thrice a year, which means every year (4x6x3) 72 samples need

to be analysed. The cost of analysis of each sample will be Rs.3000/-. Thus, every year Rs.2.16


9-2WAPCOS Limited

lakh/year will be required for analysis of water samples. The samples can be analysed from a

reputed laboratory at Barmer or Jodhpur.

9.4 AIRAn essential part of air quality monitoring is to establish a small meteorological observation

station at the mine to record daily synoptic data.

A small meteorological observation station which monitors temperature, humidity, wind direction

and speed, rainfall, etc. can be installed at the mine. An amount of Rs.10.0 lakh can be

earmarked for purchase of meteorological instruments.

Monitoring EquipmentThe post-project monitoring work can be carried out by Environmental Laboratory proposed to

be developed by RSMML at Barmer. The details of instruments to be procured alongwith cost

for monitoring of ambient air quality monitoring are given in Table-9.1

Table-9.1: Details of ambient air quality monitoring instrumentsS. No. Instrument No. Cost (Rs. lakh)

1. High volume air sampler 2 2.02. Respirable dust sampler 1 1.63. Dust fall apparatus 1 0.2

Total 3.8

It is advisable to have sufficient inventory of spares for uninterrupted operation. Particulate

matter concentration and dustfall should be monitored once in 3 season at two stations in the

vicinity of mine. The frequency of monitoring could be one sample 24 hourly, two days per week

and 4 week per season.

An amount of Rs.2 lakh/year can be earmarked for purchase of peripherals for monitoring of air

quality and meteorological parameters.

9.5 NOISENoise emissions from vehicular movement, operation of showels and graders, etc. may be

monitored during mining. The monitoring will assess the frequency and intensity of noise

emissions from various sources, and will indicate the extent of noise exposure at the receptors.

Monitoring EquipmentFor monitoring of noise generators a Sound Level Meter will be required. Noise and vibration

Spectral Analyser should be permanently installed to carry out measurement and analysis of

noise and vibrations to which personnel working in the plant are exposed. The cost of Noise

Meter is Rs. 1.5 lakh.


9-3WAPCOS Limited

9.6 MINE RECLAMATION AND GREENBELT DEVELOPMENTThe areas land filled and afforested in the mine will be monitored in various seasons to assess

the tree growth, soil erosion, canopy cover, etc.

9.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELLPost-project monitoring can be an activity of an Environmental management Cell (EMC) to be

set up at Barmer. The cell can be headed by an Environmental Engineer, reporting to the Mines

Incharge. The duties of Environmental Management Cell (EMC) shall be to:

Implement and coordinate various activities under EMP. Monitor ambient air quality Monitor ambient noise levels. Assess the growth of plants under various programme, e.g. greenbelt development, land

reclamation, etc. Collection of water samples. Compilation of data generated by various environmental monitoring activities.

The manpower requirements for the Environmental Management Cell (EMC) are given in Table-

9.2.

Table–9.2: Manpower Requirements of the Environmental Management Cell (EMC)Designation NumberEnvironmental Engineer 1Technical Assistant (Chemistry) 1Technical Assistant (Horticulturist) 1Laboratory Assistant 2Others 2Total 7

RSMML EIA study for Giral Lignite Mine, Barmer

WAPCOS Limited 10-1

CHAPTER-10

FINDINGS OF PUBLIC HEARING

10.1 INTRODUCTIONThe public hearing was conducted on 05.11.2014 at Rajeev Gandhi Sewa Kendra, Akli, Tehsil

Sheo, District Barmer. In this connection, advertisement was published in the following

newspapers(all editions) :

Dainik Bhaskar on 02-10-2014

Hindustan Times on 03-10-2014

A copy of the newspaper advertisement and the proceedings of the public hearing are given in

Appendix IX and Appendix X respectively of TOR compliance at section 1.6 in chapter -1

At the outset of the public hearing, Mr. V. S. Sankhla, Regional Officer, Rajasthan State

Pollution Control Board, Balotra, District Barmer gave a brief introduction about the provisions,

objectives, and importance of the public hearing. He explained to the public that the Giral lignite

mine is under operation since 21.12.1994. The first Environmental Clearance (EC) was

accorded on 12.12.1994 under the norms of the EIA notification 1994. Due to the expansion of

production capacity from 0.3 MTPA to 1 MTPA, another EC was granted on 03-01-2006.

However, as the mine lease period is due to be expired on 20th December 2014, a fresh EC is

required to be sought from Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change as the earlier EC

was in accordance with the EIA notification of 1994. Terms of Reference has been granted by

Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change vide letter their letter No. J-11015/94/2014-

IA-II(M) dated 10.09.2014. According to the condition No. xxxvi of point no. 5 of TOR , the

public hearing has been conducted on 05.11.2014 for Giral Lignite mine under the EIA

notification of September 14, 2006 and its subsequent amendments for the Environmental

Clearance.

A total of 167 persons resident of nearby villages, attended the public hearing conducted by

Regional Officer , Rajasthan State Pollution Control Board , Balotra under the chairmanship of

Additional District Magistrate , Barmer . The people attending the public hearing expressed their

views in the public hearing and some of them gave representations in writing about the likely

impacts of pollution and the specific local Socio-economic needs.

ADM, Barmer concluded that the lease was granted for 20 years and now renewal of lease is

pending. Due to operation of this mine, lot of developmental activities have been carried out.

However, RSMML should constitute a committee to implement provision given in EIA/EMP


WAPCOS Limited 10-2

report for improving the environment alongwith bifurcation of funds earmarked under CSR

activities.

10.2 KEY ISSUES RAISED DURING PUBLIC HEARINGThe key issues raised during public hearing and the response by RSMML are given in Table-

10.1. The Proceedings of Public Hearing is given as Annexure-III

Table-10.1: Key issues raised during public hearing and the responsePointNo.

Name of the personName of village/Dept.

Brief description of the issueraised

Brief description of thereply given by RSMML

1. Shri Narpat Singh ,Village Akli

It was stated that villagers aresuffering from diseases like ,cough & cold, TB etc. due togeneration of pollution from themines . There is no hospital invillage Thumbli and there islack of electricity , roads andmedical facilities. There is noobjection / protest against theproject but the work should becarried out under the rules laiddown by State Pollution controlBoard.

1. RSMML assured toconstruct new road aftershifting of existing Jalelaroad which will be helpfulfor movements of villagersduring rainy season.

2. RSMML has alreadyappointed a MedicalPractitioner in the areawho will provide Healthcare and medicines free ofcost.

3. RSMML will carry outmining activities as perprovisions mentioned inEIA /EMP which containsremedial measures for

2. Shri Bagta Ram,Village Giral

RSMML is mining since 1992but there is no development inproviding roads, electricity andmedical facilities. Giral villagemay be adopted by RSMMLand should be developedcovering other adjoiningvillages also.

3 Sh. Nathu Singh,village Thumbli

Mining is in operation since1992 but there is no hospital inspite of the fact that Govt. ofRajasthan had announcedconstruction of hospital duringinauguration of mine. Thereshould be pollution control overthe noise, air and water.RSMML should develop ahospital in village Thumbli sothat medical facilities areavailable for 4-5 nearbyvillages. RSMML should dumpthe material as per planningand there should be plantationin Government land (OranLand).


WAPCOS Limited 10-3

PointNo.

Name of the personName of village/Dept.

Brief description of the issueraised

Brief description of thereply given by RSMML

4 Sh. Girdhar SinghKotadia,Village Kotra

He explained that when mining& transportation in the areawas commenced in 1995 therewere only 10 trucks in the areabut the number of truckincreased to 1500 in 2005.RSMML had even contributed1.00 crore during flood whichoccurred in Barmer District.Due to transportation of lignitein the area and co-operation ofProject authorities, socio-economic status of villagershas been greatly improved andemployment opportunities forvillagers have also beenincreased. However, projectproponent should first adoptvillage Akli and village Kotraand then developmentalactivities should be started inconsultation with Panchayats.

mitigating air, noise &water pollution in the area.

4. RSMML will undertakeCSR activities inconsultation withrepresentatives ofvillagers considering theirneeds and priorities andadequate funds will beearmarked for thedevelopment activities.The health and educationissues will get priority inthe schemes of CSRunder this mining project.

5 Sh. Veer Singh,Village ,Thumbli

Project affected farmers whoseland were acquired are notgetting benefits out of thismining and they should getpriority in transportation workof lignite through trucks.

6 Sh. Jugat Singh,village Kotda

Due to operation of this project,villagers have been benefited alot but at the same time hadbeen losers due to acquisitionof land, development of cracksin their houses due to miningand blockage of roads duringrainy season.


11-1WAPCOS Limited

CHAPTER-11COST ESTIMATES

11.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANThe total amount to be spent for implementation of Environmental Management Plan is Rs.1392

lakh The details are given in Table-11.1.

Table-11.1: Cost for implementation of Environmental Management PlanItem Cost (Rs. Lakh)Rehabilitation of mine areas 1237.68Septic tank at mine 4.0Septic tank at project colony 10.0Greenbelt Development 75.0Area Development Activities 50.0Cost for monitoring equipment (Refer Table-10.2) 15.30Total 1391.98 say 1392 lakh

The total cost for purchasing necessary equipment will be about Rs.15.3 lakh (Refer Table-

11.2).

Table-11.2: Details of costs for purchase of environmental monitoring equipmentItem Cost (Rs. lakh)Instruments for monitoring of ambient air quality 3.8Instruments for micro-meteorological monitoring 10.0Noise meter 1.5Total 15.3

11.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMMEAbout Rs.4.16 lakh per year will be spent for water quality and ambient air quality monitoring

(Refer Table-11.3). The expenses on salary of staff can be borne by the central funds of

RSMML. Hence, the same has not been included in the cost required for implementation of

Environmental Monitoring Programme (EMP).

Table-11.3: Summary of costs for implementation of Environmental MonitoringProgramme

Parameter Cost (Rs.lakh/year)Water quality monitoring 2.16Peripherals for ambient air quality and meteorological monitoring 2.00Total 4.16


WAPCOS Limited12-1

CHAPTER-12

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS INVOLVEDIN THE EIA STUDY

The EIA study has been conducted by WAPCOS Ltd., a government of India Undertaking under

Ministry of Water Resources, River Development and Ganga Rejuvenation. The company has a

full-fledged Centre for Environment who has conducted the above referred study. The list of the

Experts involved in the EIA study is given in Table-12.1.

Table-12.1: List of Experts involved in the EIA studyS. No. Name Expertise Signature1. Dr. Aman Sharma EIA Coordinator

2. Dr. A. K. Sharma Ecology and Bio-diversityExpert

3. Mr. R.V. Ramana Noise Expert

4. Mr. S.M. Dixit Air Quality Expert

5. Mrs. MoumitaMondal Ghosh

Landuse Expert

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

akh

Text Box

ANNEXURE- II

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

akh

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

akh

Text Box

ANNEXURE-III

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

ats

Text Box

akh

Text Box

Documents

EIA STUDY OF GIRAL LIGNITE MINE, DISTRICT BARMER, …environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/18122014RH... · 2014. 12. 18. · WAPCOS LIMITED (A Government of India Undertaking)